JP7249649B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball winning a prize in a starting hole is established, it is determined whether or not to create a game state advantageous to the player. In this determination, the probability of determining that the game state is advantageous to the player cannot be arbitrarily set in the gaming machine.

JP 2018-47333 A

However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the enjoyment of games in gaming machines that determine whether or not to create a game state that is advantageous to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the amusement of the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game;
setting means capable of setting a set value for the determination means to make the determination;
A production control means capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means;
and an operation means operable by the player,
As an effect that can be executed by the effect control means, there is a specific effect that suggests predetermined information regarding the set value,
There are a plurality of types of setting values,
The effect mode of the specific effect includes a first effect mode associated with a group including at least two types, each of which is divided based on a predetermined standard from a plurality of types related to the set value, and various types of settings . There is a second rendering mode that is associated one-to-one with the value ,
There are a plurality of types of operation modes of the operation means,
The production control means is
At a first timing, any one of a plurality of types of operation mode of the operation means can be determined,
At a second timing after the first timing , the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode associated with the set value, and the specific effect in the first effect mode is executed. When an operation is performed in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means determined at the first timing when the display is on, the effect mode of the specific effect is associated with the set value set from the first effect mode. It is characterized by switching to the said 2nd production|presentation mode .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view for explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view for explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view for explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of display devices. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing normal figure-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special figure-related determination information. (A) is a diagram representing a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a diagram representing a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, (C) is a diagram representing a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table be. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot determination table when the set value is "1", (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination table when the set value is "2", (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a big win determination table when the set value is "3", and (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the big win determination table when the set value is "4", (E) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the big win determination table when the set value is "5", and (F) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the big win determination table when the set value is "6". (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a ready-to-win determination table. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a figure showing the structural example of a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is a figure showing the structural example of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probability variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening production, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round production, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production design, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production design display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation effect of no reach loss. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure fluctuation production until reaching reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. FIG. 24 is a continuation of FIG. 24 showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 26, showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 27 is a continuation of FIG. 27 showing an example of SP reach. It is a figure showing an example of movable body production|presentation. It is a figure showing an example of operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a pending|holding production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; It is a flowchart of game control main processing. 8 is a flowchart of setting value setting processing; It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing; FIG. 38 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 37 ; 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing. It is a flow chart of special design variation processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of production control main processing. 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; FIG. 49 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 48 ; It is a plan view of the upper plate of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the effect control board side of the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a background music system switching determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of an automatic sound volume switching determination table. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the effect control board side of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the vibration of the look-ahead hybrid effect and the vibrating sound. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the vibration of various 1st said hybrid production|presentations, and a vibration sound. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the vibration of various 2nd hybrid production|presentations, and a vibrating sound. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a look-ahead hybrid performance execution determination table, (B) is a diagram representing a configuration example of the hybrid performance execution determination table, and (C) is a diagram representing a configuration example of the hybrid performance type determination table. is. It is a figure showing the structural example of the frequency|count determination table of vibration. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a notice performance execution determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a notice performance vibration frequency determination table. It is the perspective view which represented integrally the pachinko game machine and card unit which concern on 3rd Embodiment. It is a plan view of the upper plate 34 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a specific example of the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the normal mode, (B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the first special mode, (C) is a prepaid card of the second special mode It is a figure which shows the specific example of forgetting-to-take prevention effect|action. It is a figure showing the structural example of the special mode execution determination table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a set value information suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value "6", and (B) is a set value information suggest effect execution determination table associated with the set value "5". It is a figure showing the structural example of a table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value information suggesting effect execution determination table associated with a setting value "4", and (B) is a setting value information suggesting effect execution determination table associated with a setting value "3". It is a figure showing the structural example of a table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value information suggesting effect execution determination table associated with a setting value "2", and (B) is a setting value information suggesting effect execution determination table associated with a setting value "1". It is a figure showing the structural example of a table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the setting value suggestion production|presentation by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a specific example of the left-handed production of the normal mode, (B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the left-handed production of the first special mode, and (C) is a specific example of the left-handed production of the second special mode. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a figure showing the structural example of the special mode execution determination table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side of the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing according to the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 37 ; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the effect control board side of the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing according to the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 48 . (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a semi-certainty effect execution determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a confirmation effect execution determination table. It is a diagram showing a specific example of the quasi-certainty effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the 1st confirmation production|presentation by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the 2nd confirmation production|presentation by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the 3rd confirmation production|presentation by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the structural example of the game state setting table which concerns on 7th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a cross button operation section determination table, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a notice effect execution determination table, and (C) is a view showing a configuration example of a notice effect type determination table. . It is a figure showing a mode that the production|presentation by a jackpot game production|presentation and probability variation production|presentation mode is performed. It is a figure showing a state etc. that the announcement production|presentation is performed. It is a figure showing a mode etc. that suggestive production|presentation is performed. It is a diagram showing how the advantageous game state end effect and the set value effect of the first effect method are being executed. It is a figure showing a mode that the setting value production|presentation of a 2nd production|presentation method is performed. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table according to the seventh embodiment.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characterizing portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplification of description, by describing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc. corresponding to the symbols or codes will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY refer to the left, right, up and down directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY to the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY to the pachinko gaming machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1 and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU. The game machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game parlor, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame 22 rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. a door 23;

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21 .

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22 . The front door 23 includes a frame-like front frame 23m in which a substantially vertically long rectangular large opening is formed approximately in the center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU faces the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in the game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY through the transparent plate 23t.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude of the force (shooting strength) applied to the game ball to shoot the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

An upper plate 34 protruding forward greatly and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided at the lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. A first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided in the center of the front side of the upper plate 34. - 特許庁An operating portion of the first effect button 40k protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is formed in a hemispherical shape. Further, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34. As shown in FIG. Further, the upper surface of the lower plate 35 is provided with a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing surplus game balls that cannot be stored in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Further, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the front transparent plate 23t of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, face downward and extend in a predetermined horizontal direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. In addition, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower portion of the right decorative body 32. As shown in FIG. The operating portion of the second effect button 41k is shaped like a bar. Furthermore, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34 .

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board performance unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front.

A substantially ring-shaped center decoration 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 so as to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, outside the center decoration 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration 61 and an outer rail 62 between the left portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration 61 are provided. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61 are formed.

A game area 6 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 by a center decoration 61, an outer rail 62, an inner rail 63, and the like. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration 61, the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63. As shown in FIG. A region surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launching region 7 through which the launched game ball can travel toward the playing region 6 .

The game area 6 is an area in which a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY. The game area 6 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown). The game nail is suitable for the game ball entering the game area 6 and flowing down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that guides to

A general winning device 10</b>D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6 . The general prize winning device 10D is formed with a general prize winning port 10 that allows game balls to enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. As shown in FIG. The first start winning device 11D is formed so that a game ball can enter the first start opening 11. - 特許庁The first starting prize winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball can enter. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the first starting hole 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A warp portion 61w is formed from the left side of the center decorative body 61 to the lower end thereof, through which a game ball is passed. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decoration 61. As shown in FIG. The game ball entering the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. As shown in FIG. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y for guiding the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guiding portion 61y.

Immediately below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed state and an open state by an electric-tube opening/closing member 12k provided in the electric-tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k.

The electric tube opening/closing member 12k is formed of a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from a retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6.例文帳に追加When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second start opening 12 is opened so that a ball can be entered. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball and guides it to the second starting port 12 from the horizontal portion.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61 . The gate 13 is configured to allow passage of game balls. Even if the game balls pass through the gate 13, the prize balls are not paid out. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A big winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and downstream of the gate 13 . The big winning device 14D is formed with a big winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed state and an open state by an AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the big prize winning device 14D. That is, the big winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially oblong rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that the upper end of the AT opening/closing member 14k falls forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the big winning opening 14 is opened so that a ball can be entered.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big winning hole 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the big winning hole 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, below the big winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed obliquely downward to the left, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second start port 12 is formed in the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the A game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12 , but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11 .

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 11, the second start hole 12, the big prize hole 14, and the general prize hole 10, and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as the first start hole 11, The second starting gate 12, the big prize gate 14, the general prize gate 10, and the "winning" to the gate 13 are collectively called.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot right-handed. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to enter the gate 13, the second starting hole 12, or the big winning hole 14 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right.

In addition, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board effect unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and has a display section 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1 .

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a laterally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided in the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55 k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50 . The movable board body 55k is arranged at the initial position, and in the standby state, the lower end portion of the movable board body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a portion of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player in the standby state, and the majority thereof is invisible (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and can be raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the board movable body 55k is positioned substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined working position can be appropriately set, and whether the board movable body 55k is positioned above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A in a front view. good.

In addition, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in front view about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). The rotary motion of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the plate movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the display devices 8 arranged to the right of the vertical center of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (parts other than the game area 6) will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special symbol 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1"), a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2 ) is variably displayed, and a normal pattern display 82 that variably displays a normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") is included. In addition, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the special figure 1 reservation number described later, and a special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b that displays the special figure 2 reservation number described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and the special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Also, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure indicator 81". Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The stop-displayed special figure (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a big winning game with the opening of the big winning opening 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lights up, ■: lights out) to the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot pattern and represents a jackpot. Also, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the rightmost LED is finally lit up like "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed over a predetermined variation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure may not be performed immediately. Specifically, it is a case where the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or during the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are suspended based on the winning prize. This suspended special figure lottery and variable display of the special figure are referred to as "special figure reservation".

For the special figure reservation, the special figure 1 lottery reserved based on the winning to the first start opening 11, and the "special figure 1 reservation" representing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the winning to the second start opening 12 There is a special figure 2 lottery reserved based on, and a "special figure 2 reservation" representing a variable display of the special figure 2. And, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a displays the number of special figure 1 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 lottery and special figure 1 variable display. On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 lotteries and the number of special figure 2 variable displays.

It is also possible to set or not set the upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations. Also, when providing an upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation may be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 pending indicator 83a and the special figure 2 pending indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by lighting the LEDs by the number of special figure 1 pending and special figure 2 pending Display the number of FIG. 1 pending and special figure 2 pending. In the following, the number of special figure 1 reservations is called "special figure 1 reservation number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 reservations is called "special figure 2 reservation number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 reservation number" and "special figure 2 reservation number" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". Furthermore, "special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a" and "special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

In addition, the variable display of the general pattern is executed when the general pattern lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the general pattern informs the result of the general pattern lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The stopped normal map (stop normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern, an auxiliary game with opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general pattern indicator 82 represents the general pattern corresponding to the result of the general pattern lottery, that is, the result of the general pattern lottery. When the result of the normal drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs are finally lit like "□□" (□: lighting, ▪: lighting off). This lighting mode is a winning pattern and represents a winning. In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED is finally lit like "■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as a lost pattern.

In addition, before the normal map is stop-displayed, the normal map is displayed with fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variable display mode of the normal map is a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY, there is a game control board 100 for performing control (game progress) related to a game in which a game profit can be obtained. Power is supplied to the performance control board 120 for controlling the performance, the image control board 140 for controlling the image, the payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game balls, and each board 100, 120, 140, 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches on/off of the power supply.

In the vicinity of the game control board 100, a set value cylinder 70 and a set value switch 71 are provided for changing set values, which will be described later. The setting value cylinder 70 is provided with an insertion hole 70A into which a dedicated setting key is inserted. When a setting key (not shown) is inserted into the insertion hole 70A, the set value cylinder 70 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the reference standby state. Then, as will be described later, the operation of the set value switch 71 becomes effective by rotating the set value cylinder 70 clockwise by 90 degrees from the standby state. The set value switch 71 is configured to be able to be pressed. Furthermore, on the surface of the game control board 100, a set value display 87 for displaying the current set values is mounted. The set value display 87 is composed of a red 7-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. It should be noted that games that can obtain game profits to be controlled by the game control board 100 include special figure lottery, variable display of special figure, jackpot game, setting of game state to be described later, normal figure lottery, and variable display of general figure. , Auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game memory. A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, an auxiliary A game control table and the like are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 105 . Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, when there is a prize to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 of the game ball, a special figure reservation can occur, but if a special figure reservation is possible, that is, the number of special figure reservations When the upper limit has not been reached, based on this winning prize, judgment information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special lottery or the like is acquired. And this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning the second starting port 12 of the game ball. The determination information that is to be referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information". Also, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Also, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Furthermore, the game RAM 104 is provided with a setting value storage unit 107 for storing setting value data indicating setting values to be described later.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100 . In addition, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The gate sensor 13 a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14 .

Further, various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a set value cylinder sensor 70a and a set value switch sensor 71a.

Also, the set value cylinder sensor 70 a can detect the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70 . When there is a rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70, the set value cylinder sensor 70a detects the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70, and outputs a detection signal indicating that the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated. Output to 100.

On the other hand, the set value switch sensor 71a can detect the pressing operation of the set value switch 71 . When there is a pressing operation of the setting value switch 71, the setting value switch sensor 71a detects the pressing operation of the setting value switch 71, and a detection signal indicating that there is a pressing operation of the setting value switch 71 is output to the game control board. Output to 100.

In addition, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

It should be noted that the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the game control board 100 is connected with the indicators 8 (special figure indicator 81, normal figure indicator 82, and special figure reservation indicator 83) and set value indicator 87. Display control of these indicators 8 and set value indicator 87 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The card unit CU and the payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the ejection device 72 is also connected. The card unit CU is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY, and is a device that enables ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out prize balls and rental balls. The paid-out prize balls and rental balls are detected by a pay-out sensor 73a for counting them.

A shooting device 72 is a device for shooting game balls. A handle 72k is included in the shooting device 72 and constitutes an operating section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with the handle 72k by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

Further, the handle 72k is connected to a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting motor 72m so that the game ball is shot with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

In addition, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the game control board 100 , the effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 .

In addition, the connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 is possible. That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as communication direction control means (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The performance control board 120 can be positioned as a performance control section that controls the performance together with the image control board 140, the audio control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, and board movable body 55k, etc.) for game effects, customer waiting effects, and operation promotion. It is sufficient if the performance and the like can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure fluctuation effects, pending effects, jackpot game effects, etc.), customer waiting effects, and operations of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes an operation prompting effect that prompts an operation during a valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs and the like for controlling performance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123. A performance CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 includes a starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 for storing a starting winning command to be described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designation command to be described later, and a special figure variation to store a special figure variation start command to be described later. A start command storage unit 127 and a setting value flag storage unit 128 for storing a setting value flag, which will be described later, are provided.

An image control board 140 is connected to the performance control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. to do Incidentally, the connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both transmission of signals from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50 and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 . All or part of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, patterns, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including patterns) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, through the voice control circuit 161 from the speaker 52 voice, music, and Outputs sound effects, etc.

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 . Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured by a substrate and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Also, the performance control board 120 is connected to various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120 . In addition, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k is pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k is pressed. The 1st production|presentation button sensor 40a and the 2nd production|presentation button sensor 41a will output the signal according to the content of the detection to the production|presentation control board 120, if it detects that each was operated.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The lifting member motor 55m2 can lift or lower the lifting member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, hereinafter, the operation of the "rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as the "operation of the movable board 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the lifting member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the board movable body 55k."

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100 and the like. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. In addition, the data stored in ROM123 for production|presentation of the production|presentation control board 120 is used for preparation of light emission pattern data.

It should be noted that the CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162 formed of a board. In this case, the CPU may be caused to control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like, and control the operation of the board movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a normal pattern lottery when the launched game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later.

When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed, the game ball passing through the gate 13 is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko game machine PY can perform a series of games such as a normal pattern lottery, a variable display of a normal pattern, and an auxiliary game by obtaining normal pattern related determination information when the normal pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied. As shown in FIG. 8A, normal pattern random numbers are included in the general pattern related determination information to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using a hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to hit and lose, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. If the result of the hit determination is hit, the hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. It should be noted that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination/normal pattern variable display Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern using a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table such as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving There is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (shorter normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used when in the state.

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure (losing normal figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped is determined to be a normal pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds, and the normal pattern when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of , it is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times.

Then, the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is opened

Elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko game machine PY controls an auxiliary game using an auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). It should be noted that the specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time during which it is difficult to win the game balls such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, it is longer than the first opening time, such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closed) of 1.0 seconds, and the game ball wins the electric chew 12D. The electric tube 12D is opened only for a second opening time that is easy to set.

In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also called "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in that auxiliary game. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a big winning pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Further, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the game based on the winning is terminated without the big winning game being played.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Furthermore, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Further, hereinafter, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 12 is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as a special figure lottery, a variable display of special figures, and a jackpot game by obtaining the special figure related determination information after the start condition is satisfied. And, in order to perform the variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made for the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number and a special figure variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment uses a jackpot judgment table to determine whether it is a jackpot (whether or not a jackpot game is executed), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. The big hit determination table can be provided for each set value, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10F, for example. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot determination table with the setting value.

The set value is a value such as a parameter associated with the probability of being determined to be a big win in the big win determination (hereinafter also referred to as "jackpot probability"). As will be described later, the set value can be set when the game control board 100 is powered on. By operating the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 described above, a set value can be set for each pachinko game machine PY.

In the basic embodiment, six types of set values 1 to 6 are set. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "1", a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "2", and a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "3". A big hit determination table used when the set value is "4", a big hit determination table used when the set value is "5", and a big hit determination table used when the set value is "6" There is a jackpot determination table that is used.

Further, each of the jackpot determination tables associated with the set values includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as a "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state. (Hereinafter referred to as "high-probability jackpot determination table"). Note that the types of setting values are not limited to those in the basic embodiment, and can be set as appropriate.

In each big hit determination table associated with the set value and the game state, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is distributed to the big hit, which is the result of the big hit judgment, and the loss. The pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired special symbol random number with the big win determination table associated with the set value and the game state, and determines whether it is a big win or a loss. As shown in FIGS. 10(A) to 10(F), for each set value, the high-probability jackpot determination table is a special symbol random number determination value that is determined to be a jackpot more than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. are set a lot. Furthermore, with respect to the same game state, as the set value becomes higher, more special symbol random number judgment values that are judged to be a big hit are set. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is determined to be a big hit.

In addition, it is possible to appropriately change how to distribute the special symbol random number determination value for the determination result of the jackpot probability and various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination Jackpot pattern type determination determines the jackpot pattern type (jackpot pattern type) using a jackpot pattern type determination table as shown in FIG. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of the jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot (contents advantageous to the player) composed of the game benefits given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (the jackpot symbol type determination is generated) is performed. It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

A plurality of types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

Although the types of the special figure 1 jackpot pattern and the special figure 2 jackpot pattern can be set as appropriate, for example, like the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 11 (A), the special figure 1 jackpot pattern As a result, three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, are provided. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination is, for example, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, using a reach determination table as shown in FIG. to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state, and a reach determination table (time-saving reach) used in the time-saving state. decision table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (not generate reach)", which is the result of reach determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table, and determines whether there is reach or not (whether or not reach is generated).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), the reach determination table for non-time saving and the reach determination table for time saving can be different in the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "with reach (generate reach)". It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is called "with reach (generating reach)" is called "losing with reach", and "no reach ( It does not generate reach)” is sometimes called “no reach”.

3-2-4. Special Figure Variation Pattern Judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure fluctuation pattern Judgment table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of the variable display of the special figure.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time, the so-called "scale", and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production (production contents), it is also possible to include identification information regarding the result of the big hit determination and the result of the reach determination. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the type and number of special figure variation patterns.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination was performed It is possible to associate with the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and the variable display of special figure 2 There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used when performing.

And each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is used when the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) and the time saving state used in the non-time saving state There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 pending number. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used for .

And, the variation display of the special figure of the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . After the variable display of the special figure, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable special figure display (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special figure is not performed immediately, and the next special figure is continuously displayed. , a jackpot game is executed.

Also, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure variation presentation as shown in the third column from the right of the table in FIGS. Here, a typical production that constitutes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as productions constituting the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production.

The normal fluctuation indicates that the stop-displayed performance symbols have started to fluctuate, and each one of the performance symbols is displayed variably at such a high speed that it is difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbols has started. It is a performance to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation production related to the loss fluctuation without reach (the part from the start of the fluctuation of the production pattern to the stop of the fluctuation), and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special figure fluctuation production where the reach occurs is normal fluctuation It may consist of

N reach, immediately after the reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuation, for example, the production pattern that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at that position for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The production pattern slows down, and it is a production that fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The expectation of a big hit suggested by N reach is higher than normal variation and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure fluctuation performance ends with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern that fluctuates at the low speed is stopped. In the case of a loss, the remaining one production pattern is stopped with a production pattern different from the production pattern constituting the ready-to-win. When the special figure fluctuation performance is not completed with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern fluctuates again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach can be executed both when a big win is made and when a loss is made, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will be entered, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the L reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than the N reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the L-reach dedicated background image (the L-reach dedicated video is played). Note that in the L-reach mode, a 2DCG animation image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As for the content of the L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to the SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as special training for the main character to acquire a special move.

The SP reach can be executed both at the time of a big hit and at the time of a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will occur, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer period of time than the L reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-only background image (the SP reach-only video is played). In SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the effect content of the SP reach, an image of a scene in which the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the main character's rival belongs is displayed.

A battle production|presentation is production|presentation which can be performed, for example after a reach in a time-saving state, and is production|presentation which suggests that a big-hit expectation degree is higher than normal fluctuation|variation. Even in the battle production, the established reach is maintained, but the production patterns that make up the reach are reduced and predetermined positions (upper right of)), it switches to a background image dedicated to battle production (a video dedicated to battle production flows). Also, in the battle effect, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and the "state where the reach is maintained" in the battle production, the production patterns constituting the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle production are displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition to the state in which it is visible in the display unit 50a, for example, it includes a state in which the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or invisible for a predetermined period of time in relation to the dedicated background image. Also, the contents of normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the production that constitutes the special figure fluctuation production is not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table of FIGS. 12 to 13, the special figure variation pattern can be named by associating the big hit determination result and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect. . And the special-figure variation pattern related to the big hit may be collectively referred to as "big-hit variation", and the special-figure variation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

In addition, regardless of the jackpot determination result, the special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed is "SP reach variation", the special figure variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special figure variation in N reach The special figure variation pattern that the production ends may be collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, the loss variation with reach is sometimes referred to as “loss variation with reach”, and the loss variation without reach is collectively referred to as “normal loss variation”.

3-2-5. Prefetching Judgment The pachinko gaming machine PY can make a prefetching judgment using a prefetching judgment table as shown in, for example, FIGS. be. The look-ahead determination table includes the type of starting opening related to the starting winning (first starting opening 11 / second starting opening 12), in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed according to the starting winning (special figure 1 / special figure 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in the case where the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed by winning the first start opening 11, and the second start opening 12 is won and the special figure There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 15) for the case where 2 variable display is performed. The prefetching determination based on the first prefetching determination table is also referred to as "first prefetching determination", and the prefetching determination based on the second prefetching determination table is also referred to as "second prefetching determination".

The look-ahead determination table can also be associated with later-described game states (normal game state/high-probability high-base game state/low-probability high-base game state). That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (normal game state lookahead determination table) used in the normal game state and a lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state look-ahead determination table) and a look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state (low-probability high-base game state look-ahead determination table).

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the first look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high-base game state and a second look-ahead determination table used for

In addition, by the prefetch determination using the prefetch determination table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by the winning to the start ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure variation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a look-ahead determination result. If "big hit" is specified in the look-ahead determination, the big-hit symbol type is also specified as a look-ahead determination result. In addition, using the look-ahead determination table, when specifying the propriety of the jackpot, the special symbol random number determination value corresponding to the set value is used.

And, the look-ahead judgment result containing the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a result of the prefetch determination along with its generation. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of information is specified as the prefetch determination result.

As described above, the special figure is variably displayed on the special figure display device 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination. Then, in the variable display of the special symbols, when the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special symbols is not carried out, and the big winning game is executed continuously. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the big winning port 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and the final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending.

In addition, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Also, hereinafter, the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) round game is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is also called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Then, the pachinko game machine PY controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the jackpot symbol type. One type or a plurality of types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements (jackpot game components) that constitute the jackpot game. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning opening 14 in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening to be opened, and the time to close until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can control a jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 16(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the types of jackpot games and jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 16(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 16(A) will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), 10 round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), five round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), five round games are performed. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), ten round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), round games are performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), six round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning port 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 elapses, The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. Also, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Also, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 16(A), which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. You can do so. For example, a device that can be distributed to two winning ports is provided in the game area 6, and when one winning port is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of more round games than the number or a jackpot game consisting of round games less than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, a game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be described. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not executed. The non-jackpot game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Elements that are "advantageous to the player" related to the specific game state include the probability of a big win and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 . That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start port 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

Advantageous to the player with regard to the probability of a big win means that the probability of a big win is higher than in the normal game state, and it becomes easier to win a big win. In addition, the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player when the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal game state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. It means it takes longer.

The specific game state includes a first specific game state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time are advantageous to the player, and a second specific game state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific game state and a third specific game state in which only the open time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it is also possible to mount some of the three types of specific game states without mounting all of these three types of specific game states on the pachinko gaming machine PY.

Here, as a partial game state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state and is advantageous to the player is called a "high-probability state". On the other hand, the state in which the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal game state and the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called "normal probability state".

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal game state, A state in which the easiness of opening (the easiness of opening the second starting port 12) is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "time-saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal game state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is called "non-time-saving". state.

Here, the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which it is easier to win the second starting port 12 than the non-time saving state. Here, the specific method for making it easy to win the 2nd starting mouth 12 in a time saving state rather than a non-working time saving state is demonstrated.

For example, the time saving state can be made easier to win the second starting port 12 in the time saving state by making the normal figure fluctuation time easier to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state let it be decided. As a result, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time increases in the time saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the normal drawing lottery per unit time The larger the number of executions, the longer the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time.

In addition, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time is equal, so once The longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game, the longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time.

Furthermore, by setting the time saving state to a state in which it is more likely to be determined as winning in the winning determination than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536 in the hit determination, whereas in the time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536 in the hit determination. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time and normal figure fluctuation time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability that it will be determined as a hit in the hit determination is high. , the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, so the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time increases.

In this way, the elements that make up the ease of opening the time-saving state are the probability of winning in the winning judgment (winning probability), the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game. . Then, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to shorten, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to become long. When the condition is established, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time saving state, and winning to the second starting port 12 can be facilitated. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of balls won to the number of balls fired, is high. Therefore, in the time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In addition, in a time saving state, you may make it meet only a one part condition, without meeting all the three conditions for opening time per unit time of the 2nd starting port 12 to become long. Ultimately, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state, and the winning to the second start port 12 should be facilitated.

Also, in the time saving state, such as making it easier to select a special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time compared to the non-time saving state, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed per unit time is small, or special The average of the figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure suspension is digested becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure suspension) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, each specific game state is associated with the content of the advantage for the player, the first specific game state is referred to as "high probability high base game state", and the second specific game state is referred to as "high probability low Base game state” and the third specific game state are also referred to as “low probability high base game state”. Furthermore, the normal game state is also referred to as "low probability low base game state".

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in the normal probability state and non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base game state is normal probability state and time saving state, the high probability low base game state is high probability state and non time saving state, and the high probability high base game state is high probability state and time saving state. It can be said that there is a game state.

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low-probability low-base game state, a low-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, a high-probability high-base game state, and a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is also advantageous to the player because the jackpot 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot game state and the specific game state can also be called "advantageous game state" which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the ease of winning the second start port 12 is higher than the non-time-saving state. It is in play state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state opens the jackpot 14 in which the number of prize balls per winning is greater than the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. It is a game state more advantageous to the player than the state.

Also, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is set first. Also, the jackpot game state is set by performing the stop display of the jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific game state is set when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be explained.

3-5. Setting of Specific Game State The pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific game state upon completion of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in the specific game state. The duration of this specific game state can be set appropriately. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. Also, it is possible to limit the period during which the specific game state can be continued.

When the duration of the specific game state is limited, the specific game state can be terminated when the end condition for the duration is met. Then, when the specific game state ends, the normal game state can be set. Further, as for the high-probability high-base game state, when the end condition is established, the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state may be continued until the next big win is won. Also, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state, and when the end condition is established, the normal game state may be set.

Also, the termination condition for the continuation period of the specific game state can be appropriately set. As the termination condition, for example, the number of executions of the special figure variable display can be set. In addition, not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls shot after the jackpot game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state An end condition can be set such as derivation of the result of termination in a lottery (so-called “drop lottery”) to determine whether or not. Furthermore, these elements may be set as the termination condition independently or may be set in combination.

These end conditions may be set identically for all specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You can Furthermore, the end condition may be changed for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot pattern type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled by the state. Here, the high-probability high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without providing an end condition. Furthermore, the game may be controlled in a low-probability high base game state after the end of the big-hit game relating to the big-hit symbol C and the big-hit symbol E. Here, an end condition can be provided for this low-probability high-base game state, and the end condition can be set to a special figure variable display of 100 times. It should be noted that the relationship between this jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, presence/absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

Further, paying attention to the game profit of the jackpot, the jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also called "high probability jackpot". Furthermore, a jackpot in which a game progresses in a high-probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable variable jackpot". In addition, the jackpot in which the game progresses in the normal probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also called "time saving jackpot".

4. Main Effects by Game Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a probability variable production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a customer waiting demonstration animation G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effect of the pachinko game machine PY is displayed as shown in FIG. 17(B). is displayed. Settings related to effects include setting the volume of sound output from the speaker 52, setting the brightness of the display section 50a, and setting the frequency of effects to be executed. It should be noted that the setting items related to effects can be set as appropriate. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demonstration video G100.

The normal production mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is in the normal game state. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of subordinate production modes belonging to the normal production mode. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

In addition, below, the production|presentation mode of the hierarchy of the lower rank which belongs to production|presentation mode is also called "production stage." Along with that, the first normal production mode is also called "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also called "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also called "third normal production stage". say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically after the power of the pachinko machine PY is turned on, the production mode set when the special figure fluctuation display is started for the first time is the first normal production stage ( 1st normal production mode). However, the type of effect mode that is set first is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this manner, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate. For example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Furthermore, as a switching condition, it is also possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, reach may occur in the special figure fluctuation production, but the special figure fluctuation production is established for the entire section of the special figure fluctuation production when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The former part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal variation".

Then, in the front part of the first normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 18A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the second normal production stage, the background image (FIG. 18B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the third normal production stage, a background image (FIG. 18C: third normal background image G113) mainly representing the interior of the restaurant is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a background image common to the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

In addition, the normal production mode can be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal production mode may be a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state. Alternatively, it may be set only in the "high-probability low base game state", a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Furthermore, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation production mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability high base game state. In the first part of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . Also, in the latter part of the variable probability production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability production mode is displayed.

The time saving production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability high base game state" and indicates that it is a time saving state. In the former part of the time saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . In addition, in the latter part of the time saving production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving production mode is displayed.

In addition, the time saving production mode is set in a low probability high base game state and a high probability high base game state, and is either a low probability high base game state or a high probability high base game state, and is at least a time saving state. It can also be set to a production mode that indicates that.

In addition, for either or any one of the variable probability production mode and the short production time production mode, as in the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are further provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied, the production stage is switched. You can do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19A, an opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-hand shot image G2 prompting "right-hand shot" are displayed on the display unit 50a. A jackpot opening production is displayed. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as a jackpot opening effect in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, as shown in FIG. 19B, during the round game in the jackpot game, the display unit 50a continuously displays the right-handed shot image G2 from the opening and the round image indicating the number of rounds. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a number-of-balls image G4 suggesting the number of balls paid out are displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the display unit 50a displays a background image (background for round An image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19(C), the ending image G5 indicating the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls are indicated on the display unit 50a. A jackpot ending production is performed in which a total winning ball number image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the ending image G5 and the total number of winning balls image G6 on the display unit 50a as a jackpot ending effect. be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as "jackpot game effect" as the effect executed in the big win game. That is, a big hit game effect is performed in the big win effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko machine PY has a special figure variation pattern and a special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed.

In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of performance symbols, the game stops after the performance symbols are varied. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. And, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production design.

It should be noted that, in the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, a special effect device using various production devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board movable device 55, a first production button device 40, and a second production button device 41 It is possible to perform figure variation effects.

Next, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described in the special figure variation effect executed according to the special figure variable display. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and is provided in a plurality of types. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the performance design constitutes identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of performance design are provided according to the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), it is possible to provide nine performance symbols by configuring the performance symbols with numbers from 1 to 9. Then, the production design including the number "1" is set as the production design G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For the sake of convenience, when dealing with individual production designs without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "production designs G10".

Also, the number portions of the production symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The number portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, a color is included in the component of the production pattern G10. It should be noted that the configuration of the production pattern G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 20(B), the left side, the center and the right side of the display unit 50a are divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction, and the left effect pattern area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol. It can be a region 50b3. A production design G10 is displayed in each of the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first stage part of the special figure fluctuation production, the production design G10 displayed in the left production design area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left production design EZ1", and the production design G10 displayed in the middle production design area 50b2. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "the middle effect symbol EZ2" and the "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3, the production design G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the production design in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20(B), a small pattern area 50c for variably displaying small patterns can be provided in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display portion 50a. In the small design area 50c, the small design can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small pattern can be appropriately set, but for example, the number part of the effect pattern G10 can be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 20(B), the left effect pattern region 50b1, the middle effect pattern region 50b2, the right effect pattern region 50b3, and the small pattern region 50c are indicated by a dashed line, but this is the left effect pattern region 50b1, These are shown to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

In addition, as described above, there are normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects as effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect. Some of these are described here.

4-2-1. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal variation will be specifically described. As small patterns, a left small pattern KZ1, a medium and small pattern KZ2, and a right small pattern KZ3 corresponding to the left production pattern EZ1, the middle production pattern EZ2, and the right production pattern EZ3 are variably displayed in the small pattern area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 21(A), in the display section 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol are displayed. The symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and from the state of waiting for the variable display of the special figure, when the variable display of the special figure is started, FIG. 21 (B) As shown in , the special figure fluctuation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small pattern KZ1, the middle and small pattern KZ2 and the right small pattern KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be made different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the respective performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. It is also possible to change the position one after another at a fixed position. Incidentally, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be made the same.

Further, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at a high speed immediately after the variable display is started. While the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically background images such as the background images G111 to G115. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is a special figure variation pattern of no reach loss (for example, normal loss variation), the end of the variable display of the special figure (special figure stop display), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in the losing eyes peculiar to the reachless losing (so-called "breaking eyes").

Toward the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(C), the left performance symbol EZ1 is temporarily stopped at the approximately center position in the vertical direction, and then shown in FIG. 21(D). As shown, the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped at the approximately center position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 21(E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped at the approximately center position in the vertical direction.

Finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state of being horizontally aligned at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 21(F). Confirm (stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the temporarily stopped production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped with loose stitches, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 become the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3. The small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped all at once at the same loose stitch, and the stop display is also performed.

In the example of FIG. 21, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1→right performance symbol EZ3→middle performance symbol EZ2. The aspect is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, establishment of reach will be described. Even if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern (for example, N loss fluctuation) with reach, basically in the same manner as the case of no reach described above, in the display unit 50a, As shown in FIG. 22(A), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 22(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 associated with the number "5" is temporarily stopped at the approximately center position in the vertical direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 22(D). Thus, the right performance symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are horizontally aligned at substantially the center position in the vertical direction and temporarily stopped, and reach is established. Incidentally, even if the reach is established with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 22, when the ready-to-win is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left production pattern EZ1→the right production pattern EZ3, but the mode of temporary stop is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. can be done. Also, the number of the production pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win is not limited to "5". Further, the temporary stop position is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Also, the direction in which the performance symbols constituting the ready-to-win are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special figure fluctuation production in the case of no reach loss and the interval from the start of the special figure fluctuation production to the establishment of the reach when reach occurs can be made normal fluctuation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure variation pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various announcement effects such as a so-called "pseudo-continuation", a cut-in announcement, a line announcement, etc. until the ready-to-win is established. Alternatively, it is possible to plunge into a so-called "zone" until reach is established.

4-2-3. N reach The pachinko game machine PY can perform N reach when reach is established after normal variation. The N-reach is an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special lottery may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. Next, the N reach will be specifically described.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 22(D), N reach is performed from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 23A, the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N-reach is started, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the middle effect symbol EZ2 that is displayed (scrolled) at high speed in the normal mode gradually decelerates.

When the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, N loss variation), from the state where the reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 is temporarily stopped at the vertical direction approximately center position. Then, the stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 23 (C-1), the middle production pattern consisting of numbers ("4" in FIG. 23 (C-1)) different from the numbers constituting the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. Stop display of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 is performed.

In addition, when the temporarily stopped production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped by the losing eyes peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, three small patterns KZ1 to KZ3. However, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped all at once with the same reach-related loss, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed. Note that the content of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure fluctuation production does not end with N reach, as shown in FIG. Reach may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L reach Pachinko game machine PY can perform L reach after N reach. The L reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in the L reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, a background image exclusively for the L reach (L reach background image G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L-reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Three is deployed. The content of the story of the moving image related to the L-reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to a girl.

When the L-reach background image G114 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a certain meeting place. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 24B, a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at substantially the center of the display portion 50a, as the middle effect pattern EZ2, the effect pattern of the number "5" forming the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" not forming the reach appear. Then, it rotates slowly so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the production pattern of number "4" and the production pattern of number "5" are continuously rotated, the three related to the background image G114 for L reach advances. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(C), the main character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the approximate center of the display part 50a, the effect pattern of the number "5" which constitutes the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" which does not constitute the reach mutually repel the opponent. collide with. Since the production pattern of the number "5" constitutes the reach, and the production pattern of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the production pattern of the number "4" is flipped off and the production pattern of the number "5" is replaced. If it remains, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big win is established, while when the performance symbol of the number "5" is flipped away and the performance symbol of the number "4" remains, the performance of the mode indicating reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 24(C) is the final stage of the L-reach, and a production suggesting a big hit (jackpot suggesting production) is executed or a production suggesting a loss (loss suggesting production) is executed. It constitutes a branch point (so-called “hit-lose branch point”) where it branches.

At the win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 25(B-1), the main character who is happy with the successful confession is displayed. As shown, the main character who is pleased with the successful confession is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52 . At this time, together with the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitute the reach, the medium effect pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display part 50a. displayed in the form. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.

The display of the main character who is pleased with the successful confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitutes a jackpot suggestive effect. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 25 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

On the other hand, after the winning branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the background image G114 for L reach is displayed without a jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 25(A-2), the display unit 50a shows a close-up of a girl with a sad expression, and then, as shown in FIG. 25(B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. Shows the main character. At this time, along with the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach, the middle production pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped in the center of the display part 50a. is displayed. That is, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach-losing.

The display of the main character, who is disappointed because he failed to confess, constitutes a production suggesting failure. After the losing suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 25(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

4-2-5. SP reach In addition, the pachinko game machine PY can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the L reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in SP reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 26A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the moving image related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and an enemy character who are rivals of the main character face each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 26A, an enemy character appears, and then, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach (“Kill the enemy batter XX!!” in FIG. 26B) and an effect image G11b that complements the title image G11a. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26C, a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 27(A), the main character throws the ball, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 27(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character comes to an end. This scene constitutes a branching point (win-lose branching point) at which the main character wins and suggests a big win in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, or loses and suggests a loss.

After this win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a big hit variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 28(B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and shouts on the mound is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character screaming after winning the confrontation and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute the big win suggestive presentation. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 28(C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

28 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 28 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the main character who is disappointed after being defeated in the confrontation constitutes the production suggesting failure. After the loss suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 28(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

Next, the movable body production and the operation production performed in the special figure fluctuation production will be described. The movable body production and the operation production are the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, and N reach, and even when they are performed as part of these productions in the form of being incorporated in the jackpot game production, etc., and independent of these productions. may be performed. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body effect involving the action of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body production is, for example, a production using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a production that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body production functions as a production that suggests development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view, and held at that position for a predetermined time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4. Operation Effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko game machine PY provides an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure fluctuation effect or a big hit game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance. It works as a performance.

For example, as described above, when the hit-drop junction is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and this first effect button Along with the occurrence of the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 30A, an effect (first effect button operation promotion effect) for prompting the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed.

In the first effect button operation promotion effect, a first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing Operation image) G12b, and an image (first effect button operation effective period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation effective period (first effect button operation effective period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k. .

The first effect button operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curvilinear progress bar so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period as time elapses. change to In addition, FIG. 30(B) shows a state in which the first effect button operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the first effect button operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), after the first production button 40k is pressed in the first production button operation effective period, or the first production button After the first effect button 40k is not operated in the operation effective period and the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period expires, the operation result effect is performed.

As an operation result presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable body presentation. Further, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result presentation. Then, as shown in FIG. 30(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k rises, thereby ending the operation result presentation. When the operation result production ends, a jackpot suggestion production is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is reach loss fluctuation (SP loss fluctuation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed in the first production button operation valid period, or the first production button Even if the remaining time of the effect button operation effective period expires without the pressing operation of 40k, the operation result effect is not performed, and the failure suggesting effect is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special figure variation performance, and can be executed in the big hit performance as well.

4-5. Look-Ahead Effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display that is the target of the special figure reservation will be described. The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead performance for the special figure 1 suspension or the special figure 2 suspension in which the big hit determination is not performed based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation performance. . The look-ahead performance is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve, and functions as a performance for expecting a big win from before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reserve. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a pending change notice using a pending effect representing a special figure pending. Here, the suspension effect and the suspension change notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31A, the suspension effect is performed in a suspension display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section of the lower end of the display section 50a. The reserved display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the reserved display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. That is, in the reservation display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is performed first based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs first among the special figure 1 reservations being reserved. A pending icon representing the special figure 1 pending is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 reservation A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed in the 2nd to 4th is displayed.

In the following, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1". Similarly, the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the fourth area 50d4 "reserved order 2 special figure 1 hold", "reserved order 3 of It is called "special figure 1 reservation" and "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, for the existing special figure 1 reservation, it is called "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 50e is formed to the left of the reserved display area 50d. In the variable display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display that is currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is not included, but since the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon will be collectively referred to as “suspended effect”. . Also, the pending icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation display during execution indicated by the icon is also referred to as "the fluctuation".

In FIG. 31(A), the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by broken lines. It is shown to show the ranges of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the variable display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the holding effect will be described. In the following description, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is during the special figure 1 variable display (during the special figure variation production), and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 31(B), in the first region 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred first among the currently suspended special figure 1 suspension (reservation order 1 special figure 1 suspension) is displayed, and in the second region 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred next to the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA2 (reservation order 2 A pending icon HA3 representing special figure 1 pending) is displayed. In addition, the icon HA1 representing the special figure 1 variable display that is currently being executed is displayed in the variable display area 50e (not shown). Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 31B is the normal mode.

In this way, in the suspension effect, they are displayed side by side from the left end of the suspension display area 50d to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 suspension has occurred. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol suspension storage unit 105 is individually displayed with a suspension icon. be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 31(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension representing the suspension icon HA2, the suspension icon HA2 and the suspension icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the first region 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display region 50e (not shown), and the pending icon HA3 displayed in the second region 50d2 (not shown) is disabled. It moves to the illustrated first area 50d1. That is, the suspended icon HA2 and the suspended icon HA3 that have been displayed are shifted one by one to the left. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 pending represented by the pending icon HA3 is the first special figure 1 pending among the currently pending special figures 1 pending. This is to adapt the pending icon HA2 and the pending icon HA3 to the situation in accordance with the fact that the special figure variable display is started next.

In addition, since the pending icon HA2 displayed in the variable display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the variable display area 50e. That is, as the words before "icon", the icon displayed in the reserved display area 50d is "reserved", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is "relevant". In other words, when the pending icon is displayed, if the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is established for the special symbol pending indicated by the pending icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the starting condition is started. A corresponding pending icon is displayed as the icon.

Note that when the reserved icon changes to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the reserved display area 50d to the variable display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 31(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when the game ball enters the first start port 11 and special figure 1 suspension occurs, as shown in FIG. An icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when the special figure 1-related random number is acquired by winning the first starting port 11, one common icon is displayed. This icon disappears when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (suspended state and running state) , it will exist under different names (pending icon and the icon in question).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the pending icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the win/fail information and the special figure variation pattern information. Displaying the suspension icon in a special mode is called "suspension notice".

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when the pending notice is given, the player can expect to win a big win by variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of a hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the suspension notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 31(E) is a special mode.

As one type of pending notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the pending icon is displayed. There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 31(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 31(E), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the suspension icon HA4 of the normal mode is displayed in the above-described second region 50d2 (not shown). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made completely stationary, the display position does not move, but It may be configured so as to sway lightly on the ground.

Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 32(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32(B)) (hold notice is given). In the examples of FIGS. 31 and 32, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after being displayed, but it may be displayed in the special mode to eliminate the period of display in the normal mode.

As another type of pending notice, there is a pending notice type that becomes a special mode when the pending icon moves, in other words, a pending notice type in which a pending icon change notice is performed during the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 31(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, as shown in FIG. 33(B), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the second region 50d2 (not shown) of the normal mode (white in FIG. 33(B)) is displayed as the suspension icon HA4. to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 33(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA3, as shown in FIG. The suspended icon HA3 thus moved moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the suspended icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 33(D)) (hold notice is performed). .

Moreover, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the pending advance notice so that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon is associated with the color of the pending icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the pending icon. Here, white is the normal aspect and green, red, and gold are special aspects. The degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white<green<red<gold.

In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA. It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55 . Furthermore, as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues without interruption until the special figure fluctuation display is started after being executed, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, the effect pattern is stopped. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as each time the display is performed or each time the variable display of the effect symbols is started.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 [Game Control Main Processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 44. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 . The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the power supply voltage is supplied to the game control board 100 from the power supply board 190, the game control microcomputer 101 reads and executes the game control main process program shown in FIG. 34 from the game ROM 103. FIG.

As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, the game control microcomputer 101 first prohibits interrupts (S1), and then permits access to the game RAM 104 (S2). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a set value setting operation for setting a set value has been performed (S3). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value cylinder 70 is rotated from the reference state and the set value switch 71 is pressed. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting value setting operation is not performed, the process proceeds to step S4, and if it is determined that the setting value setting operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S7, and the setting value for setting the setting value After performing the setting process, the process proceeds to step S8. The setting value setting process will be described later.

In step S4, the game control microcomputer 101 performs setting processing of the game RAM 104 for setting the initial value in the use area of the game RAM 104 that requires the initial value. It is set in the output buffer and transmitted to the effect control board 120, and in step S6, the set value indicated by the set value data stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is displayed on the set value display 87, and step Proceed to S10.

Further, in step S8, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the use area of the game RAM 104, performs setting processing of the game RAM 104 for setting the initial value in the use area of the game RAM 104 that requires the initial value, In step S9, a RAM clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S10, the game control microcomputer 101 performs CTC activation setting processing for setting the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like, and permits interrupts in step S11.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process in step S12. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, 1 is added to the counter value of various random numbers related to the normal symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the power supply is cut off in step S13. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit of the power board 190 . When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply is not cut off, the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power has been cut off, it prohibits interrupts in step S14, prohibits access to the game RAM 104 in step S15, and controls the data stored in the game RAM 104. is stored as backup data, and the system waits until the pachinko game machine PY is powered off.

[Setting value setting process]
Next, the set value setting process (S7) will be described with reference to FIG. In the setting value setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 first stores the setting value data backed up in the game RAM 104 in the setting value storage unit 107 in step S51, and sets the setting value indicated by the setting value data. It is displayed on the value display 87 (S51).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value switch 71 has been operated in step S52. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting value switch 71 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S55, and if it determines that the setting value switch 71 has been operated, in step S53, the setting value storage unit of the game RAM 104 The set value indicated by the set value data stored in 107 is incremented by "1" to set a new set value, and the new set value is displayed on the set value display 87 in step S54.

In the basic embodiment, the set value is set in six stages from 1 to 6, and when the set value switch 71 is operated when the set value is "6", the set value "1" is newly set. will be The manner in which the set value is changed by operating the set value switch 71 is not limited to an increase of "1", but may be a decrease of "1" or a random change.

In step S55, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not there is an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the set value cylinder 70 is turned off based on the set value cylinder sensor 70a, that is, whether the set value cylinder 70 is rotated from the set state and returned to the basic state. determine whether or not If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is no setting value confirmation operation, the process proceeds to step S52, and if it is determined that there is a setting value confirmation operation, in step S56, the setting value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is stored. A setting value specifying command indicating the setting value indicated by the setting value data is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120, the setting value setting process is finished, and the process returns to the game control main process.

It should be noted that the setting value setting process is completed and the setting value is confirmed by performing the rotation operation for shifting the setting value cylinder 70 from the setting state to the reference state in step S55. It can be positioned as an operation for making On the other hand, the operation of rotating the set value cylinder 70 from the reference state to the set state in step S3 can be regarded as an operation for setting the set value. Hereinafter, the former operation will be referred to as the "set value confirmation operation" of the set value cylinder 70, and the latter operation will be referred to as the "set value setting operation" of the set value cylinder 70. FIG.

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, game control side timer interrupt processing will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the game control board 100, and the game control side timer interrupt shown in FIG. Execute the process.

As shown in FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 101 first executes the output process (S101) in the game control side timer interrupt process. In the output process, commands set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process, the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting that the surplus ball storage hole 35A is full, and stores it in the game RAM 104 as the lower tray full data. Store in output buffer.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the game control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the counter value of various random numbers related to the general figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information is the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process, and the other period (after the end of the game control side timer interrupt process , the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process is started).

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S106). Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and terminates the game control side timer interrupt processing. As other processing, a timer provided in the game RAM 104 is updated. In addition, as other processing, a payout control process of paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first start port 11, the prize ball counter for the second start port 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning port 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning port 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170.例文帳に追加Then, when a prize ball signal is transmitted, update processing is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter associated with the signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S12 to S13 of the game control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time. Execute side timer interrupt processing. The game control microcomputer 101 outputs the commands set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process executed again. .

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If the game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO at S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if the game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES at S201), a predetermined number of game balls General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the general winning hole 10 (for example, “3”) is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 .

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status = 1, which will be described later, in other words, whether either the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO at S204), proceed to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES at S204), the counter value of the normal design random number counter (label-TRND-F) (S205), the obtained general pattern random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 proceed to

In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 12, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second start port 12 (NO at S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second start port 12 (YES at S207), the predetermined A second starting hole prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second start hole 12 (for example, "4") is added to the prize ball counter for the second start hole 12.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 2 reservation number counter) that counts the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "4" or more (is less than "4") ( NO in S209), special figure 2 reservation number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 2 reservation number counter, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern fluctuation pattern random number counter (label - TRND-HP ) is acquired, and stored in a special figure-related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first start port 11 (NO at S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first start port 11 (YES at S214), the predetermined A first start opening prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the first start hole 11 (for example, "4") is added to the prize ball counter for the first start hole 11.

Next, the special figure 1 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more (S216). If the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "4" or more (less than) (NO in S216 ), special figure 1 reservation number addition processing is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 1 reservation number counter, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern fluctuation pattern random number counter (label - TRND-HP ) is acquired, and stored in a special figure-related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first prefetch determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, in the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. 14, the current game state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 are compared to identify the first start winning command and identified A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. When the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 14 (NO at S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and when the game ball has entered the big winning hole 14 (YES at S221) It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "9" (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winning big winning openings 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the specified prize number is set to "8". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "9" or more, that is, less than "9". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the big winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), ending the sensor detection process. In the big winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the big winning hole 14 (for example, “14”) is added to the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14 .

A sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided as a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, and based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor, processes other than the processes shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 are performed. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a description will be given of normal operation processing relating to the control of the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D. As shown in FIG. 39, the processing relating to the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (steps). "Normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", normal design standby processing (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", normal design variation processing (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. "Normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal design waiting process (S1102), hit determination is performed based on the normal design random number stored in the normal design reservation storage unit 106. - 特許庁Further, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal pattern fluctuation display of the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82. and change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command according to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal pattern fluctuation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed since the normal pattern fluctuation display being executed started (whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display is terminated). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has passed, the normal figure stop display is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal design determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed. In the normal pattern determination process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the normal pattern being executed started (whether to end the stop display of the normal pattern) or not), and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. If it is not a winning pattern (if the stopped normal pattern is a losing pattern), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

Auxiliary game control processing (S1105) is processing that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special action processing]
Next, the special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, the processing relating to the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into six statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special action status" (S1501).

When the "special action status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special action status" is "2", the special symbol variation. Processing (S1503) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3", a special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "5", game state setting processing (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby when the special symbol variable display and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

Special design fluctuation processing (S1503) is the processing which is done when the special design is indicated fluctuatingly. The special symbol variation processing will be detailed later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special design confirmation processing will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. A game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to a jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. The special action status is changed to "5" when the jackpot game ends. In addition, when each round game is started, a round number specifying command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . Also, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot pattern related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting the game state to be controlled after the big win game when the big win game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, a high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high-probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104 . In addition, when controlling in the time saving state after the jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, when limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "time saving prescribed number of times") is set to the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating a game state after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the game state setting process.

[Special symbol standby process]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the special figure It is determined whether or not the number of 1 pending is "0" (S1608). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO at S1618), a customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol standby process.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" but the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start When there is one or more storage of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning to mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is read out first, and the jackpot determination table associated with the current setting value In the above, it is determined whether it is a big win or a loss (big win determination) based on a big win determination table associated with the game state.

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol random number is read and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, the jackpot pattern data representing the jackpot pattern type is set in a special buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the pattern designation command indicating the jackpot pattern type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加

Also, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the losing design data representing the losing is set in the special figure buffer, and the design designation command representing the losing is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state (S1652), then proceed to step S1654, If it is not a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), time-saving After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the big win determination result is "big win". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read, and the reach random number is compared with the reach determination table corresponding to the current game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is reach or not.

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the result of reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658) Then proceed to step S1660, if there is no reach (NO in S1656), check the current special figure 1 pending number, step S1652 or step S1653 in either special figure 1 variation pattern determination table From select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss according to the number of special figure 1 reservations (S1657) and then proceed to step S1660.

The game control microcomputer 101, in step S1660, reads out the special figure variation pattern random number, and compares the special figure variation pattern random number to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659, Perform special figure 1 variation pattern determination to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern to the output buffer (S1661), and special figure variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern Time is set to the special action timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

It should be noted that the special action timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the special figure 1 variation start command to be set includes information on the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and the special figure variation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) Contains information on the results (information on the special figure fluctuation pattern, including information on the presence or absence of reach and special figure fluctuation time).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 indicator 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the first reservation in (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reserved number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved indicator 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special action status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and special symbol standby processing is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is finished without executing step S1617.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, the storage of special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 is one or more If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are basically the same processing content as special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) .

Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602), except that the table used in the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since it is the same processing as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609), the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process ( Since this is the same processing as in S1610), the description is omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 indicator 81b to start the variation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the 4th reservation in (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 reservations are digested in the order they were reserved.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 reserved number counter (S1606), and changes the special figure 2 reserved number indicated by the special figure 2 reserved indicator 83b by decreasing "1" (S1607 ), change the special action status to "2" (S1615), and proceed to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of special symbols based on the special figure 1 reservation is performed only when the special figure 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of Toku-zu 2 pending is executed with priority over the digestion of Toku-zu 1 pending. And in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation makes it easier for the player to win a big winning pattern that is more profitable than the lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed with priority over the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation and the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation may be performed in the order in which the reservation occurred regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbols, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has passed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter=0) (S1701). If the special symbol variation display is not terminated (NO at S1701), the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is terminated (YES at S1701), the special symbol variable display is performed on the special symbol display device 81. is terminated, and a special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or losing special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer at step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure determination time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special action timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the special symbol fluctuation display is finished is output to the buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol determination process (S1504), that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether or not operation counter=0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not terminated (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol stop display is terminated (YES in S1751), the current normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), it proceeds to step S1757, and if it is in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), it proceeds to step S1757. "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving remaining number counter that measures the number of times (time saving remaining number of times) (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1755), proceed to step S1757. YES), the time saving state is shifted to the non-working time saving state (the time saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether or not the special symbol that is currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot pattern (NO in S1758), the special action status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special pattern determination process is finished, and if it is a jackpot pattern (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset ( The normal game state is set.Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0" (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special action status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the jackpot symbol type in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening corresponding to the stopped jackpot pattern is in progress is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. set the time from when the player is done to the start of one round) in the special action timer. Furthermore, according to the type of the jackpot pattern, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot pattern is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The opening command corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stop-displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

Also, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the RAM 124 for effect. The effect control microcomputer 121 provided in the effect control board 120 reads out and executes the effect control main processing program shown in FIG. 45 from the effect ROM 123 when the pachinko game machine PY is powered on.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. It should be noted that the random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the effect contents such as random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination and special figure variation effect pattern determination random numbers, which will be described later.

As an example of a method for updating the determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation production start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening production start command, a round production start, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects), and the sub-drive board. Via 162, the frame lamp 53 is lit (executing various effects by light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (executing various effects by action). In addition, various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, jackpot ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the receive buffer of the effect RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing suitable for the image effect. is output to the sub-drive board 162 . That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs mobile device control processing (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4104), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 10msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. Effect control microcomputer 121, in the 10ms timer interrupt process, first performs a received command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis processing will be described in detail in a first embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, based on the effect content indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect data set in the effect RAM 124, etc., the audio data (data for controlling the output of the sound from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161. is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data creation processing (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, the light emission data is created based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124 and the like.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process, first, from the game control board 100 start winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) received or not, in other words, received starting winning command It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES at S4301), it proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs start winning process in response to the game ball winning the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. FIG. In the start winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 in the RAM 124 for performance. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. The look-ahead effect includes not only a reserved icon notice of displaying the reserved icon in a special mode, but also a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 outputs a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display section 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the content of the prefetch effect indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect by the image. A sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (performs the prefetch effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted via the sub-drive board 162 (performs the prefetch effect by light emission), and the board movable body It is possible to activate 55k (perform a look-ahead effect by action).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the design designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the design designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the design designation command is not received (NO at S4303), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4305. is stored in the pattern designation command storage unit 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure fluctuation start command is not received (NO in S4305), while proceeding to step S4307, if the special figure fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are determined. , Special figure fluctuation production start processing (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation production is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure fluctuation start command in the special figure fluctuation start command storage unit 127 in the production RAM 124 in the special figure fluctuation production start processing. Next, based on the contents of the stop special figure indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 (type of jackpot symbol, loss special figure) and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed to EZ3, and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol to determine the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special figures and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure variation pattern. In each stop design pattern determination table, a plurality of production designs EZ1 to EZ3 and small designs KZ1 to KZ3 have a random number value for stop design pattern determination (stop design pattern determination) so as to have a predetermined allocation rate (%). value) are distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number with the selected stop symbol pattern table in the stop symbol pattern determination, and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for performance. For example, a combination of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that the special figure variation pattern is a reach-less loss variation, so-called "separate eyes". In addition, if the special figure fluctuation pattern is reach and loss fluctuation, the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are the same, and the middle production pattern EZ2 is different from them. A KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special figure variation pattern is a big hit variation, a combination of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that it becomes a so-called "double eye" according to the production mode and the type of the big hit pattern. .

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 selects a special figure fluctuation production pattern in which the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are associated based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the staying production mode and the special figure fluctuation start command. A special figure variation performance pattern determination table for performing special figure variation performance pattern determination to be determined is selected. A plurality of special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table, one or more special figure fluctuation production pattern has a random number value for special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment value) are distributed. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number counter as a special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number, and special figure based on the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number. Variation performance pattern determination is performed.

In the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number with the selected special figure fluctuation production pattern table, determines the special figure fluctuation production pattern, and determines. Data representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, a special figure variation performance start command indicating the special figure variation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure variation performance is set. Set (overwrite) to a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for effect the special figure fluctuation effect data indicating the pattern.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined amount from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a special figure variation effect by the image.

In addition to the special figure fluctuation production start command by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation production by the sound output from the speaker 52, the special figure by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53 The contents of the figure fluctuation production and the contents of the special figure fluctuation production by the action performed by the board movable body 55k are included.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, while the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure fluctuation production contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation production start command transmitted to the image control board 140 In response, output the sound from the speaker 52 through the voice control circuit 161 (execute the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound), and emit the frame lamp 53 through the sub-drive board 162 (special figure by light emission (performs the variation performance), and operates the board movable body 55k (performs the special figure variation performance by the action).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is stored in the reception buffer. Production control microcomputer 121, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4307), while proceeding to step S4309, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4307), special figure fluctuation A special figure fluctuation production end process (S4308) for ending the production (stopping the variable display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 and performing stop display) is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the special figure fluctuation production end processing, and appropriately ends the special figure fluctuation production based on the analysis result (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small pattern KZ1 To stop the fluctuation display of ~KZ3) set the special figure fluctuation effect end command to the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, it ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command is stored in the reception buffer. If the game state command is not received (NO in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4311, and if the game state command is received (YES in S4309), the game state command is analyzed. , to specify the game state represented by the game state command, perform the game state setting process (S4310) for setting the game state, the effect mode setting process (S4311) for setting the effect mode.

The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 in the game state setting process. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state. Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the high probability high base game state. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “02H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the low probability high base game state.

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 newly sets the game state flag "01H" indicating the high-probability high-base game state in the game state flag area of the performance RAM 124, the high-probability high-base game state is set. Set the probability variable production mode that suggests. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns ON the effect mode flag indicating the probability variable effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and transmits the probability variable effect mode start command indicating that the probability variable effect mode is set to the effect RAM 124. output buffer. When the probability variable effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the background image G120 for probability variation is displayed as the background image, and BGM for probability variation is output as BGM.

Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 121 newly sets the game state flag “02H” indicating the low-probability high-base game state in the game state flag area of the production RAM 124, when the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability A time-saving performance mode is set in which it is difficult or impossible to determine which of the high-probability base game states. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 turns ON the production mode flag indicating the time reduction production mode in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and transmits the time reduction production mode start command indicating that the time reduction production mode is set to the production RAM 124. output buffer. When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the time saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time saving BGM is output as the BGM.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 newly sets the game state flag "00H" indicating the low probability low base game state in the game state flag area of the production RAM 124, when the low probability low base game state (normal game state) is set. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the effect mode flag indicating the normal effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and transmits the normal effect mode start command indicating that the normal effect mode is set to the effect RAM 124. output buffer. When the normal effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 generates the first normal effect as the background image. background image G110 is displayed, and normal BGM is output as BGM.

In step S4312, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command is stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO at S4312), it proceeds to step S4314, and if it has received the customer waiting command (YES at S4312), the customer waiting production standby process is performed. (S4313), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect pattern to the start of the customer waiting effect as the customer waiting effect. Set a timer. Note that the effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has passed. output buffer.

In step S4314, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4314), while proceeding to step S4316, if it has received the opening command (YES in S4314), the jackpot associated with the start of the opening of the jackpot game Opening effect start processing is performed (S4315).

The performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening performance start processing, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is to be executed, the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern) is selected, and a jackpot opening performance start command for starting the jackpot opening performance in the selected jackpot opening performance pattern is output from the performance RAM 124. set in the buffer.

In step S4316, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command is not received (NO in S4316), while proceeding to step S4318, if the round number designation command is received (YES in S4316), the round production start processing is performed along with the start of the round game. (S4317).

In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect corresponding to the round game to be started from now on, and executes the round effect if it is to be executed. (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In step S4318, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO at S4318), while proceeding to step S4320, if the ending command has been received (YES at S4318), the jackpot ending effect start processing accompanying the start of the jackpot game ending (S4319) I do.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start processing, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed from now on, and executes it. The performance contents of the jackpot ending performance (jackpot ending performance pattern) are selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In step S4320, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the setting value designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the setting value designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the setting value designation command is not received (NO at S4320), the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the reception command analysis process, and if the setting value designation command is received (YES at S4320), setting value designation. A set value setting process is performed to store a set value flag representing the set value indicated by the command in the set value flag storage unit 128 in the effect RAM 124 (S4321), and the received command analysis process ends.

<First Embodiment>
Next, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the pachinko game machine PY of the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, as the first embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment includes a cross button 42k as operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. As shown in FIG. 50, the cross button 42k is arranged to the left of the first effect button 40k on the upper surface of the upper plate 34, and is configured to be able to be pressed like the first effect button 40k.

The cross button 42k is shaped like a disk as a whole, but includes a part that protrudes in the shape of a "cross" in the center of the plane. An operation unit 42ku which has an upper operation unit 42ku located on the upper side, a lower operation unit 42kd located on the lower side, a right operation unit 42kr located on the right side, and a left operation unit 42kl located on the left side, and which constitutes the cross button 42k. , 42kd, 42kr, and 42kl can be independently pressed. In the following description, the upper operation portion 42ku and the lower operation portion 42kd of the cross button 42k are collectively referred to as "up/down button 42k1", and the right operation portion 42kr and left operation portion 42kl of the cross button 42k are collectively referred to as "left and right operation portions." button 42k2”.

The cross button 42k is connected to the cross button sensor 42a. As shown in FIG. 51, the cross button sensor 42a is also connected to the effect control board 120 in the same manner as the first effect button sensor 40a. The cross button 42k and the cross button sensor 42a are integrally formed, and the combination of the cross button 42k and the cross button sensor 42a is called the "cross button device 42".

The cross button sensor 42a detects which part related to the operation of the cross button 42k, specifically, which one of the upper operation section 42ku, the lower operation section 42kd, the right operation section 42kr, and the left operation section 42kl is pressed. can be detected. In other words, the cross button sensor 42a includes an upper operation section sensor 42au for detecting an operation on the upper operation section 42ku, a lower operation section sensor 42ad for detecting an operation on the lower operation section 42kd, and an operation on the right operation section 42kr. and a left operating section sensor 42al for detecting an operation to the left operating section 42kl.

When each of the operation section sensors 42au, 42ad, 42ar, and 42al detects an operation to each of the operation sections 42ku, 42kd, 42kr, and 42kl, a signal (upper operation section A detection signal, a lower operation part detection signal, a right operation part detection signal, a left operation part detection signal) is output to the effect control board 120 . In the following description, the upper operation section sensor 42au and the lower operation section sensor 42ad of the cross button sensor 42a are collectively referred to as "upper and lower button sensors 42a1", and the right and left operation section sensors 42ar and 42ar of the cross button 42k. 42al are collectively referred to as "left/right button sensor 42a2".

In addition, in the first embodiment, during the game in which the game by the game control microcomputer 101 such as special figure fluctuation display and jackpot game is being performed, and during the non-game in which the game by the game control microcomputer 101 is not performed, By operating the cross button 42k or the first effect button 40k, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 52, the light emitted from the frame lamp 53, and the light emitted from the image display device 50 can be changed. is configured to allow

In the first embodiment, both the sound volume and the amount of light can be changed between six levels from the minimum level "1" to the maximum level "6". However, the number of steps and the name of the steps can be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of levels of sound volume and the number of levels of light intensity do not necessarily have to be the same, and the number of levels of sound volume and the number of levels of light intensity may be different.

For example, the volume can be changed during a game by operating the left/right button 42k2. When the left operation portion 42kl of the left/right button 42k2 is operated, the volume is decreased by one level, and the right operation portion 42kr of the left/right button 42k2 is decreased. to increase the volume by one step. However, even if the left operation unit 42kl is operated when the volume is set to the lowest level "1", the level "1" is maintained without changing the volume. Similarly, even if the right operation unit 42kr is operated when the volume is set to the maximum level "6", the volume is maintained at level "6" without being changed.

In addition, the amount of light can be changed during the game by operating the up/down button 42k1. When the lower operation portion 42kd of the up/down button 42k1 is operated, the amount of light decreases by one step, and the upper operation portion 42ku of the up/down button 42k1 is activated. to increase the light intensity by one step. However, even if the lower operation unit 42kd is operated when the light intensity is set to the minimum level "1", the light intensity is maintained at the level "1" without being changed. Similarly, even if the upper operation unit 42ku is operated when the light amount is set to the maximum level "6", the light amount is maintained at level "6" without being changed.

Note that the operation method for changing the volume and the amount of light can be set as appropriate. Further, when the volume is changed by operating the left/right button 42k2, immediately after that, the volume is switched to the changed volume. For example, if the volume is changed while sound is being output from the speaker 52, the volume is switched while the sound is being output. Further, when the light amount is changed by operating the up/down button 42k1, the light amount is switched to the changed light amount immediately after that. Further, when the light amount is changed while the image display device 50 is emitting light or the frame lamp 53 is emitting light, the light amount is switched while the light is being emitted.

Changes in volume and amount of light are performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 . The production RAM 124 of the production control board 120 is provided with a volume storage section 129 for storing volume and a light amount storage section 130 for storing light amount.

In addition, when outputting the volume, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the sound from the speaker 52 based on the volume stored in the volume storage unit 129, and displays the image on the image display device 50 or the frame lamp 53. When the light is emitted from the light amount storage unit 130, an image is displayed or light is emitted based on the light amount stored in the light amount storage unit 130. FIG.

Next, the sound effect executed in the normal effect mode relating to the normal game state will be described. In the first embodiment, as described in the basic embodiment, in the normal production mode, the first normal production stage → second normal production stage → third normal production stage → first normal production stage → . , the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect stage are switched in order.

Then, in the front part of the first normal production stage, the first normal background image G111 (FIG. 18A) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and in the front part of the second normal production stage, the display unit 50a displays: A second normal background image G112 (FIG. 18(B)) is displayed, and a third normal background image G113 (FIG. 18(C)) is displayed on the display section 50a in the front part of the third normal effect stage. be. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode A dedicated background image (L reach background image G114 or SP reach background image G115) corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

In this way, for the first part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the background image corresponding to the type of normal effect mode (first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, third normal effect stage) is displayed on the display unit 50a, while the background image corresponding to the type of reach (L reach, SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a for the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage. . Similarly, with respect to the sound, the types of normal effect modes (first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, third normal effect stage) are determined for the preceding stages of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage. While the background music (BGM) according to is output from the speaker 52, for the latter part of the first normal production stage to the third normal production stage, the reach type (first normal production stage, second normal production stage, BGM corresponding to the production stage, the third normal production stage) is output from the speaker 52. - 特許庁

In the following, the BGM in the front stage in the normal effect mode is called "normal front BGM", and the BGM in the rear part in the normal effect mode is called "normal rear BGM". Further, with regard to the normal pre-stage BGM, the normal pre-stage BGM corresponding to the first normal effect stage is referred to as "first normal pre-stage BGM", and the normal pre-stage BGM corresponding to the second normal effect stage is referred to as " The normal BGM for the front stage corresponding to the third normal production stage is referred to as the "third normal front BGM". Furthermore, regarding the normal latter stage BGM, the normal latter stage BGM corresponding to L reach is called "normal L reach BGM", and the normal latter stage BGM corresponding to SP reach is called "normal SP reach BGM". called.

Next, the BGM for the normal preceding stage will be described. As described above, the normal front-stage BGM includes the first normal front-stage BGM, the second normal front-stage BGM, and the third normal front-stage BGM, depending on the type of normal effect mode. As a method itself, a non-loop type that is composed of a time several times longer than the special figure fluctuation time according to the SP fluctuation pattern with the longest special figure fluctuation time, and is reproduced seamlessly across a plurality of special figure fluctuation effects; There is a loop type that is completed in the first part of the special figure fluctuation effect of the time. Therefore, in detail, as the first normal pre-stage BGM, a non-loop type first normal pre-stage BGM (non-loop first normal pre-stage BGM) and a loop type first normal pre-stage BGM (loop first normal pre-stage BGM) As the second normal BGM for the pre-stage, there are a non-loop type second normal pre-stage BGM (non-loop second normal pre-stage BGM) and a loop type second normal pre-stage BGM (loop 2nd normal pre-stage BGM), and as the 3rd normal pre-stage BGM, there are a non-loop type 3rd normal pre-stage BGM (non-loop 3rd normal pre-stage BGM) and a loop type 3rd normal pre-stage BGM. BGM (loop third normal front stage BGM).

The non-loop first normal pre-stage BGM, the non-loop second normal pre-stage BGM, and the non-loop third normal pre-stage BGM are composed of different tunes. Similarly, the loop first normal pre-stage BGM, the loop second normal pre-stage BGM, and the loop third normal pre-stage BGM are also composed of different tunes. In the following, the non-loop first normal pre-stage BGM, the non-loop second normal pre-stage BGM, and the non-loop normal pre-stage BGM are referred to as "non-loop normal pre-stage BGM". The pre-stage BGM, loop second normal pre-stage BGM, and loop third normal pre-stage BGM are referred to as "loop normal pre-stage BGM".

Once the non-loop normal front stage BGM is basically reproduced, it continues to be output continuously even after the special figure fluctuation display ends. Therefore, while the non-loop normal front stage BGM is being output, unless the special figure variation production related to the L reach fluctuation or the SP reach fluctuation is executed, the normal front stage BGM is distributed across a plurality of special figure fluctuation productions. executed. However, when the L reach or SP reach is started, the non-loop normal preceding stage BGM is once switched to the normal L reach BGM or the normal SP reach BGM. Then, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the loss in the L reach or SP reach are stopped and displayed, the normal L reach BGM or the normal SP reach BGM related to the normal effect stage is switched to the non-loop normal first stage BGM. . However, when switching to the non-loop normal front-stage BGM, the non-loop normal front-stage BGM may be started from the beginning, or may be started from the point when the normal L reach BGM or the normal SP reach BGM is switched to. . In addition, in a situation where the special figure fluctuation production is completed but there is no special figure reservation, and the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed without a new special figure fluctuation production being performed, a non-loop is performed until the demonstration production is started. The BGM for the normal previous stage continues to be output. It should be noted that a time is provided for each piece of music that constitutes each non-loop normal front-stage BGM. Then, when the music as the non-loop normal front stage BGM ends, it immediately starts from the beginning. The time of the song that constitutes each non-loop normal first stage BGM is not particularly limited, but basically, while the song is playing, a special variable effect that does not perform L reach or SP reach is performed multiple times. configured to run repeatedly. Therefore, for example, each non-loop normal pre-stage BGM has a duration of about 3 to 5 minutes. Note that the times of the songs forming each non-loop normal front-stage BGM may all be the same or may be different.

On the other hand, the BGM for the loop normal front stage is started from the beginning every time the special figure fluctuation display is started, and the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the special figure fluctuation production related to the no reach fluctuation, or the reach It ends by developing into L reach and SP reach with special figure fluctuation production related to the existence fluctuation. It should be noted that a time is also provided for the music itself that constitutes the BGM for the normal pre-stage of each loop. The time of the song that constitutes the BGM for each loop normal front stage is not particularly limited, but basically, at least from the start of the special figure fluctuation effect to the start of the L reach or SP reach, enough 1 It is composed to the extent that one song can be continued. Therefore, for example, the length of the music that constitutes the BGM for the normal pre-stage of each loop is approximately 1 to 2 minutes. It should be noted that the times of the tunes forming the BGM for the normal pre-stage of each loop may all be the same or may be different.

As described above, as the normal front-stage BGM system, the non-loop type and the loop type are provided, but the normal front-stage BGM system is basically set according to the set value. That is, when the set value is set to an odd number (1, 3, 5), the BGM for the loop normal preceding stage is output, and when the set value is set to an even number (2, 4, 6), the non-loop normal BGM is output. BGM for the previous stage is output.

However, in the second normal production stage in the normal production mode, if the set value is set to the highest set value "5" among the odd numbers (1, 3, 5), the loop second normal front stage The BGM may switch to the BGM for the non-loop second normal front stage, and if the set value is set to the highest set value "6" among the even numbers (2, 4, 6), the non-loop second normal front stage In some cases, the BGM for the second normal pre-stage of the loop is switched from the BGM for the loop. In other words, in the second normal effect stage, there is a possibility that the background music system is switched (background music system switching) based on the set value.

Next, the "background music system switching" in the second normal production stage will be described. Background music method switching in the second normal production stage is performed by the production control microcomputer 121 . For example, when the special figure fluctuation stop command is received, the production control microcomputer 121 performs the process related to the background music system switching (background music system switching process) after finishing the special figure fluctuation production end processing of step S4308.

The effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the second normal effect stage is set in the background music method switching process. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the second normal production stage is not set, the background music system switching process is finished, the processing is returned to the received command analysis process, and the second normal production stage is set. Once determined, it is next determined whether or not the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" is set. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value "5" or the set value "6" is not set, it ends the background music system switching process, returns the process to the received command analysis process, and sets the set value "5". Alternatively, if it is determined that the set value "6" is set, then it is determined whether or not background music system switching is currently being performed.

As will be described later, when "background music system switching" is currently being performed, that is, the loop second normal preceding stage BGM should originally be flowing, but the non-loop second normal preceding stage BGM is flowing. Alternatively, if the non-loop second normal preceding stage BGM is supposed to be flowing but the loop second normal preceding stage BGM is flowing, it indicates that "background music system switching" is being performed in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124. The background music method switching flag is ON. Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the "background music system switching" is performed, the background music system switching process is finished, and the processing is returned to the received command analysis process, and the "background music system switching" is performed. If it is determined that the background music system is not switched, next, background music system switching determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform "background music system switching".

Background music system switching determination is executed with reference to a background music system switching determination table. The background music system switching determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123 . FIG. 52(A) shows a configuration example of the background music system switching determination table. The background music system switching determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of "background music system switching" is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 52(A). In the first embodiment, the selection rate for executing the "background music system switching" is set to "5%", and the selection rate for not executing the "background music system switching" is set to "95%". It is

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to switch the background music in the background music system switching determination, it turns on a background music system switching flag in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124 . Furthermore, when the setting value "5" is set, the effect control microcomputer 121, when the special figure confirmation time has passed since the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, the second normal front stage of the loop BGM for non-loop second normal pre-stage BGM. In addition, when the setting value "6" is set, the effect control microcomputer 121, when the special figure fixed time has elapsed after starting the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the non-loop second normal The BGM for the preceding stage is switched to the BGM for the second normal preceding stage of the loop.

Once the "background music method switching" is performed, the non-loop second normal pre-stage BGM or the loop second normal pre-stage BGM after switching remains unchanged until the end of the second normal production stage. output continues. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the background music method switching flag when the switching condition for switching the normal effect stage described above is satisfied and the next third normal effect stage is set. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the background music method switching flag when a big win is won in the second normal effect stage and the big win game starts. Then, when the "background music system switching" is performed and the second normal effect stage ends, the second normal front stage BGM in the format corresponding to the set value is output in the next new second normal effect stage. .

Next, "switching of volume based on set value" that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the first embodiment, “1” to “6” are provided as the volume of the sound output from the speaker 52 . In the first embodiment, when the set value "6" is set, the player does not operate the left/right button 42k2 if the volume is set to less than "6" in the normal effect mode. In spite of this, the volume of the normal L reach BGM related to L reach or the normal SP reach BGM related to SP reach is suddenly switched to volume "6" during the execution of L reach or SP reach. be. Further, when the set value "5" is set, if the volume is set to less than "5" in the normal effect mode, the player does not operate the left/right button 42k2. During the execution of reach or SP reach, the volume of normal L reach BGM related to L reach or normal SP reach BGM related to SP reach may be automatically switched to volume "5". Note that, hereinafter, the switching of the volume based on the setting value is referred to as "automatic volume switching". Further, automatic volume switching may be performed, and L reach and SP reach, which are targets of automatic volume switching, may be referred to as "automatic volume switching target effects".

Here, the "automatic volume switching" in the normal production mode will be explained. “Volume switching” in the normal production mode is performed by the production control microcomputer 121 . For example, in step S4012, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs processing related to automatic volume switching (automatic volume switching processing) after the light emitting data creation processing in step S4203.

The effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the normal effect mode is set in the automatic sound volume switching process. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the normal production mode is not set, it returns to the 10 ms timer interrupt processing after completing the automatic volume switching process, and determines that the normal production mode is set. , the setting value flag is checked to determine whether or not the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" is set.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" is not set, the automatic volume switching process is finished and the process is returned to the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the setting value "5" or When it is determined that the set value "6" is set, then check the special figure fluctuation start command and special figure fluctuation production data, L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching object production) is performed special figure It is determined whether or not a variable performance is being executed.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation production in which the L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching target production) is performed is not executed, the automatic volume switching process is finished and the processing is performed to the 10 ms timer interrupt process. Return, L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching target effect) When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation effect is performed, next, L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching target effect) at a predetermined timing ( For example, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of L reach or SP reach). Production control microcomputer 121, for example, when the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" is set, when the special figure fluctuation production L reach or SP reach is performed, predetermined control processing Elapsed time from the start to a predetermined timing in L reach or SP reach is measured.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that it is not the predetermined timing in the L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching target production), the automatic volume switching process is finished and the process is returned to the 10 ms timer interrupt process, L reach or SP When it is determined that it is the predetermined timing in the reach (automatic volume switching object effect), next, whether or not the volume at which automatic volume switching can be performed is set, in detail, the set value "5" is set. If the set value is set to "6", it is determined whether or not a volume other than "6" is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the volume capable of performing automatic volume switching is not set, the automatic volume switching process is finished, the process is returned to the 10ms timer interrupt process, and automatic volume switching can be performed. If it is determined that the volume is set, then automatic volume switching determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform "automatic volume switching". Automatic volume switching determination is executed with reference to an automatic volume switching determination table. The automatic volume switching determination table is stored in the performance ROM 123 . FIG. 52B shows a configuration example of the automatic volume switching determination table. The automatic volume switching determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of "automatic volume switching" is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 52(B). In the first embodiment, the selection rate for executing "automatic volume switching" is set to "10%", and the selection rate for not executing "automatic volume switching" is set to "90%". there is

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to execute automatic volume switching in the automatic volume switching determination, if the set value "5" is set, the volume is switched to "5", and if the set value "6" is set. If so, switch to volume "6". In addition, when the volume of the set value volume switching object effect is switched to volume "5" or volume "6", the switching of the volume is effective only in the special figure fluctuation effect. That is, after the special figure fluctuation effect is completed, the sound effect is executed by the volume at which the switching is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the style of the background music may be switched based on the set value in the second normal effect stage. Therefore, in general, background music is less likely to attract the player's interest compared to an effect that suggests the possibility of winning a big prize. Since the setting value is suggested with a new feeling by making the user feel a sense of incongruity, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, it is difficult for the player to notice that the style of the background music is switched, and a high level of attention and knowledge is required to notice the change, so that the player can feel a sense of superiority that he/she was the only one who noticed it. Furthermore, the style of the background music set in advance differs depending on the setting value, and when the background music of each style is being output, it may switch to the background music of the other style based on the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of switching the background music system and prevent the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, automatic volume switching target effects such as L reach and SP reach have a high degree of expectation for big hits and a long production time compared to normal fluctuation and N reach, which constitute the first part of the special fluctuation production. , in the effect, the player tends to stop shooting the game balls and concentrate on the effect. In such a situation, since automatic volume switching is performed based on the set value, the player can easily notice the volume switching based on the set value. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the game interest.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, loop-type background music is basically set when the setting value is an odd number, and non-loop-type background music is set when the setting value is an even number. The relationship with the music system is not limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, non-loop type background music may be set when the set value is an odd number, and loop type background music may be set when the set value is an even number. Alternatively, non-loop type background music may be set for any set value, and the loop type may be switched based on the set value. Alternatively, loop-type background music may be set for any set value, and the background music may be switched to non-loop type based on the set value.

Also, in the first embodiment, the background music system is switched in the second normal production stage in the normal production mode, but the type of production mode in which the background music system is switched is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. Also good. Background music method switching may be performed in either or both of the first normal effect stage and the third normal effect stage, which are other effect modes in the normal effect mode. Alternatively, background music method switching may be performed in the entire normal presentation mode. Furthermore, background music method switching may be performed for the probability variable performance mode related to the high probability high base game state and the time reduction performance mode related to the high base game state.

Furthermore, in the background music system switching determination, the probability (selection rate) of determining that background music system switching is to be executed is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Also, the probability (selection rate) at which it is determined that the background music system should be switched may be different between the case of the setting value "5" and the case of the setting value "6". For example, in order to make it easier to switch the background music system when the set value is "6", which is advantageous for the player, the background music system is switched more easily when the set value is "6" than when the set value is "5". may be executed to increase the probability of being determined.

Further, in the first embodiment, the background music method switching can be executed when the setting value is "5" or "6", which is relatively advantageous to the player. The set values are not limited to those in the first embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case of the set value "1" and the set value "2", which are relatively disadvantageous to the player, the background music method switching may be enabled. Alternatively, the switching of the background music method may be made executable when the set value is "1", which is most unfavorable to the player, and when the set value is "6," which is most advantageous to the player. Alternatively, the switching of the background music method may be enabled in the case of the set value "2" which is relatively unfavorable to the player and in the case of the set value "5" which is relatively advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the loop type and the non-loop type are set as the method related to the game for the background music, and the method is switched. good. For example, the loop type and the non-loop type may be set for the background image displayed on the display unit 50a and the frame lamp 53, and the method may be switched. Furthermore, as a method related to the game, instead of the loop type and non-loop type related to the effect, for example, a manual method with an operation effect operation related to the operation effective period and an automatic method without operation. May be set.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, basically, automatic volume switching can be executed in L reach or SP reach, but the effect in which automatic volume switching can be executed, that is, the automatic volume switching target effect is not limited to these. You may change it suitably. For example, automatic volume switching may be made executable in normal variation and N-reach. In addition, the automatic sound volume switching may be executed in any one or all of the jackpot game effects, more specifically, the opening effects, the round effects, and the ending effects. Furthermore, there is a so-called "dish full error" that suggests that the lower tray 35 is full of game balls, and a so-called "right-handed error" caused by hitting right-handed in a normal game state in which basic left-handed hitting is performed. , automatic volume switching may be made executable.

In addition, in the first embodiment, automatic volume switching can be performed when the set values are relatively advantageous to the player: "5" and "6". is not limited to the first embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, automatic volume switching may be enabled only when the set value is "6", which is most advantageous to the player. Alternatively, automatic volume switching may be enabled in the case of set values "1" and "2", which are relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this case, if the setting value is "1", the volume may be switched to "1", and if the setting value is "2", the volume may be switched to "2". Alternatively, the automatic volume switching may be made executable in the case of the setting value "1" which is most disadvantageous to the player and in the case of the setting value "6" which is most advantageous to the player. In this case, if the setting value is "1", the volume may be switched to "1", and if the setting value is "6", the volume may be switched to "6". Furthermore, automatic volume switching may be enabled in the case of set values "4" to "6", which are relatively advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the relationship between the set value and the volume related to automatic volume switching is not limited to the first embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, both the set value "5" and the set value "6" may be switched to volume "6". That is, the switching to volume "6" may suggest that the set value "5" or the set value "6", which is advantageous to the player, is set. Furthermore, the switching to volume "1" may suggest that the setting value "5" or "6", which is advantageous to the player, is set. In addition, in the case of the set value "1" and the set value "2" which are relatively unfavorable to the player, automatic sound volume switching can be executed, and by switching to the sound volume "6", setting unfavorable to the player It may be suggested that a value of "1" or a set value of "2" is set. Moreover, the sound volume is not limited to six levels in the first place, and may be changed appropriately. Then, for example, by switching to the highest level of sound volume, it may be suggested that the set value "5" or the set value "6", which is advantageous to the player, is set. Alternatively, by switching to the lowest level of sound volume, it may be suggested that the set value "1" or the set value "2", which is disadvantageous to the player, is set.

Furthermore, the probability (selection rate) of determining that automatic volume switching is to be executed in the setting value volume switching determination is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Also, the probability (selection rate) at which it is determined that automatic volume switching is to be executed may be different between the case of the setting value "5" and the case of the setting value "6". For example, in order to make it easier to perform automatic volume switching when the setting value is "6", which is advantageous to the player, automatic volume switching is performed more when the setting value is "6" than when the setting value is "5". Then, the probability of determination may be increased.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a second embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment, the first effect button 40k that can be operated by the player is configured to vibrate. A detailed description of the structure for vibrating the first effect button 40k is omitted, but inside the upper plate 34, a first effect button motor 40m for vibrating the first effect button 40k is installed. The first effect button motor 40m is composed of a motor.

FIG. 53 shows a block diagram of the effect side according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53 , the first production button motor 40m is connected to the production control board 120 . That is, the first effect button motor 40m constitutes various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 . The rotation of the first production button motor 40m causes the first production button 40k to vibrate.

The effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the first effect button 40k, in the same manner as the control of the operation with respect to the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2. Controls the operation of button 40k.

Then, in the second embodiment, the vibration of the first effect button 40k and the sound output from the speaker 52 are used to suggest the set value and the effect of suggesting the possibility of a big win is executed. In the following, an effect that suggests a set value and that there is a possibility of winning a big win is referred to as a "hybrid effect". Therefore, the hybrid effect serves both as a setting value suggesting effect suggesting information about the set value and an advance notice effect suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win.

There are cases where the hybrid performance is executed when the special figure reservation occurs and when the special figure fluctuation performance is started. And, when it is executed at the time of special figure reservation occurrence and when it is executed at the time of special figure fluctuation production start, the production mode of the hybrid production is different. In the following, the hybrid effect executed at the time of occurrence of the special figure reservation is called "predictive hybrid effect", and the hybrid effect executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation effect is called "the hybrid effect".

The look-ahead hybrid effect is executed only when the setting value "6" is set. That is, the look-ahead hybrid effect is a effect suggesting that the set value "6" is set. In addition, as will be described later, the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed based on the look-ahead determination result indicated by the start winning command. Then, the execution of the look-ahead hybrid effect is determined as a big hit by the big hit determination based on the special figure reservation corresponding to the start winning command (the special big hit special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure variable display). It also suggests that it could be done.

The hybrid effect is executed regardless of which set value is set, and suggests information regarding a predetermined set value according to the content of the effect. In addition, as will be described later, the hybrid effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result indicated by the special figure variation start command. Execution of the hybrid performance also suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed with the jackpot pattern stopped and displayed in the special prize variable display corresponding to the special prize variation start command.

Next, the content of the hybrid presentation will be described. 54, 55, and 56 are diagrams schematically showing the contents of various hybrid effects. FIG. 54 is a diagram schematically showing the effect content of the look-ahead hybrid effect, and FIGS. 55 and 56 are diagrams schematically showing the effect content of the hybrid effect.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the look-ahead hybrid effect, the first effect button 40k vibrates for a relatively long time, and the speaker 52 outputs a predetermined electronic sound. Specifically, in the look-ahead hybrid effect, the first effect button 40k vibrates for a relatively long time (hereinafter referred to as "long vibration") intermittently six times, and each long vibration is performed. Then, the speaker 52 outputs a “sound corresponding to the long vibration (long vibration sound)” representing the long vibration. In the second embodiment, the duration of vibration for long vibration is set to "2 seconds", and the interval between each long vibration is set to "1 second" in the look-ahead hybrid effect. Also, the long vibrating sound is composed of an electronic sound called "Burururururururu".

In the hybrid effect, the first effect button 40k vibrates for a relatively short time (short vibration), and the speaker 52 outputs a "sound corresponding to the short vibration (short vibration sound)" representing the short vibration. As the effect types associated with the effect contents of the hybrid effect, there are a first effect type and a second effect type. Hereinafter, the hybrid effect of the first effect type will be referred to as "first relevant hybrid effect", and the hybrid effect of the second effect type will be referred to as "second relevant hybrid effect".

The first hybrid effect is executed regardless of which set value is set. As shown in FIGS. 55(A) to 55(F), in the first hybrid effect, the first effect button 40k vibrates for a relatively short time (hereinafter referred to as "short vibration") once to six times. When short vibration is performed each time, a sound (short vibration sound) corresponding to the short vibration is output from the speaker 52 . That is, the number of short vibrations and the number of vibrating sounds match. Then, the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound in the first hybrid effect suggests setting values that are highly likely to be set. Specifically, when the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is 1, the setting value "1" is most likely set. Similarly, if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is 2, the setting value "2" is most likely set. If the value "3" is most likely to be set and the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is 4, then the setting value "4" is most likely to be set and the number of short vibrations and vibrations If the number of sounds is 5, the setting value "5" is most likely set, and if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is 6 times, the setting value "6" is set. most likely.

On the other hand, the second hybrid effect is executed when the set value "2" to the set value "6" are set. As shown in FIGS. 56(A) to 56(E), in the second hybrid effect, the short vibration is performed the number of times corresponding to the set value, and the short vibration is performed up to the last short vibration. While the short vibration sound is output from the speaker 52 in response to the short vibration when the short vibration is being performed, the short vibration sound is not output from the speaker 52 when the last short vibration is performed. That is, the number of short vibrations and the number of vibrating sounds do not match. Then, the set value is reported as the number of times of short vibration in the second hybrid effect. Specifically, when the number of short vibrations is two, the set value is set to “2”. Similarly, when the number of short vibrations is 3, the set value is set to "3", and when the number of short vibrations is 4, the set value is set to "4". When the number of vibrations is five, the set value is set to "5", and when the number of short vibrations is six, the set value is set to "6".

In addition, when the short vibration is performed a plurality of times in the hybrid effect, the short vibration is performed intermittently. Further, in the second embodiment, the duration of the vibration for the short vibration and the duration of the short vibration sound are set to "1.0 seconds", and in the hybrid effect, the interval of each short vibration is set to "0.5 seconds". is set to In addition, the short vibrating sound is composed of an electronic sound "Buru".

Next, a method of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead hybrid effect will be described. Whether or not to execute the look-ahead hybrid effect is determined by the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination. The look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 . When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it has received the starting winning command in step S4301, it determines whether or not the hybrid effect or the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed in the starting winning process of step S4302. If it is determined that it has not been executed, a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination is performed based on the received start winning command. This is to prevent the overlapping execution of the look-ahead hybrid effect and the hybrid effect, and the overlapping execution of the look-ahead hybrid effects.

The look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination is executed with reference to a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table. The look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation pattern information, which is the look-ahead determination result. As shown in FIG. 57(A), as a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table, a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, A look-ahead hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the SP loss variation, a look-ahead hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the L loss variation, a look-ahead hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the N loss variation, and a normal loss. A look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the variation is provided. Each look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of the look-ahead hybrid effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57(A).

According to the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table, it may be determined to "execute the look-ahead hybrid effect" both in the case of the big hit variation and in the case of the loss variation. That is, when the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed, it may be a big win or a loss. Therefore, the look-ahead hybrid effect suggests that there is a possibility that the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the big hit is performed in the special figure fluctuation effect related to the special figure reservation indicated by the start winning command and the jackpot game state is entered. It is a performance to do. In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation and in the case of non-reach fluctuation (normal loss fluctuation), it may be determined to "execute the look-ahead hybrid effect". That is, when the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed, it may or may not develop into reach. Therefore, the look-ahead hybrid production is a production that suggests that there is a possibility that it will develop into a reach with the special figure fluctuation production related to the special figure reservation indicated by the starting winning command.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that "read-ahead hybrid production is to be executed", the first production button 40k is vibrated for a long time, and a notification sound is output from the speaker 52 to execute the reading hybrid production.

Next, the method of determining whether or not to execute the hybrid effect, the type of effect in the case of executing the hybrid effect, and the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound output in the case of executing the first hybrid effect. I will explain how. Whether or not to execute the hybrid effect is determined by the hybrid effect execution determination. The said hybrid production|presentation execution determination is performed by the microcomputer 121 for production|presentation control. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation start command is received in step S4305, after setting the special figure fluctuation production start command in the special figure fluctuation production start processing of step S4306, the hybrid production or the look-ahead hybrid production It is determined whether or not it is executed, and if it is determined that neither is executed, the hybrid production execution determination is performed based on the received special figure fluctuation production start command. This is to prevent redundant execution of the look-ahead hybrid effect and the hybrid effect, and redundant execution of the hybrid effects.

The hybrid effect execution determination is executed with reference to the hybrid effect execution determination table. The hybrid effect execution determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. As shown in FIG. 57(B), as the hybrid performance execution determination table, the hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, the hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, The hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the SP loss variation, the hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the L loss variation, the hybrid performance execution determination table associated with the N loss variation, and the normal loss. A hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the variation is provided. Each hybrid effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the hybrid effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57(B).

According to the hybrid effect execution determination table, it may be determined that "the hybrid effect is to be executed" both in the case of the big hit variation and in the case of the loss variation. In other words, when the hybrid effect is executed, a big win or a loss may occur. Therefore, in the hybrid effect, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the big hit is performed in the special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure variation start command. It is a production that suggests something. In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation and in the case of non-reach fluctuation (normal loss fluctuation), it may be determined that "the hybrid effect is executed". That is, when the hybrid effect is executed, it may or may not develop into reach. Therefore, the hybrid effect is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a reach with a special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure variation start command.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the hybrid effect is executed" in the hybrid effect execution determination, it determines whether or not the set value "2" to the set value "6" are set. Then, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the setting value "2" to the setting value "6" are set, it performs the hybrid production type determination for determining the production type of the hybrid production.

The hybrid effect type determination is executed with reference to the hybrid effect type determination table. The hybrid effect type determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. As shown in FIG. 57(C), as the hybrid performance type determination table, the hybrid performance type determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, the hybrid performance type determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, The hybrid performance type determination table associated with the SP loss variation, the hybrid performance type determination table associated with the L loss variation, the hybrid performance type determination table associated with the N loss variation, and the normal loss A hybrid effect type determination table associated with the variation is provided. Each hybrid effect type determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for the effect type of each hybrid effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57(C).

According to the hybrid effect type determination table, it may be determined as "first effect type" or "second effect type" both in the case of a big hit change and in the case of a losing change. That is, even if the hybrid effect of any effect type is executed, it may result in a big hit or a loss. Therefore, in the first hybrid effect and the second hybrid effect, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit is performed in the special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure variation start command. This is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state. Also, in both the case of reach fluctuation and the case of non-reach fluctuation (normal loss fluctuation), it may be determined as "first effect type" or "second effect type". That is, when the hybrid effect is executed, it may or may not develop into reach. Therefore, the first hybrid effect and the second hybrid effect are effects suggesting that there is a possibility that the special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure variation start command may develop into a reach. .

Production control microcomputer 121, in the hybrid production type determination, when it is determined to be the second production type, confirms the set value, from the start of the special figure fluctuation production to be started from now, the second according to the set value The hybrid performance is started. On the other hand, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the hybrid performance type is determined as the first performance type, and before the hybrid performance type determination, the set value "2" to the set value "6" are not set. If it is determined as such, then vibration count determination for determining the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds in the first hybrid effect is performed.

The determination of the number of times of vibration is performed with reference to a determination table of the number of times of vibration. The vibration frequency determination table is associated with set values. As shown in FIG. 58, as the vibration frequency determination table, the vibration frequency determination table associated with the setting value "6", the vibration frequency determination table associated with the setting value "5", and the setting value "4". , a vibration frequency determination table associated with the setting value "3", a vibration frequency determination table associated with the setting value "2", and a setting value "1" A vibration frequency determination table attached is provided. Each vibration frequency determination table is appropriately set so that the selection ratio with respect to the frequency of each short vibration and vibration sound is a predetermined selection ratio shown in FIG.

According to the vibration frequency determination table, when the setting value is "6", the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds may be determined as "4" to "6", while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1" to It is never judged as "3". Therefore, if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "4" to "6", the setting value "6" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1" to "3". , there is no possibility that the set value "6" is set. In addition, when the set value is "6", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibrating sounds is determined to be "6" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is "6", there is a high possibility that the setting value "6" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the setting value is "5", the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds may be determined as "3" to "6", while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1". ” to “2”. Therefore, if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "3" to "6", the setting value "5" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1" to "2". , there is no possibility that the set value "5" is set. In addition, when the set value is "5", the probability that the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is determined to be "5" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is "5", there is a high possibility that the setting value "5" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the setting value is "4", the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds may be determined as "2" to "6", while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1". ” will not be judged. Therefore, if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "2" to "6", the setting value "4" may be set, but if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1", There is no possibility that the setting value "4" is set. In addition, when the set value is "4", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibrating sounds is "4" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is "4", there is a high possibility that the setting value "4" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the setting value is "3", the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds may be determined as "1" to "5", while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "6". will not be judged as Therefore, if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1" to "5", the setting value "3" may be set, but if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "6" There is no possibility that the setting value "3" is set. Also, in the case of the set value "3", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibrating sounds is determined to be "3" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is "3", there is a high possibility that the setting value "3" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the setting value is "2", the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds may be determined as "1" to "4", while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "5". ” to “6”. Therefore, if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1" to "4", the setting value "2" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "5" to "6". ”, there is no possibility that the set value “2” is set. In addition, when the set value is "2", the probability that the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is determined to be "2" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is "2", there is a high possibility that the set value "2" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the setting value is "1", the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds may be determined as "1" to "3", while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "4". ” to “6”. Therefore, if the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1" to "3", the setting value "1" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "4" to "6". , there is no possibility that the set value "1" is set. In addition, when the set value is "1", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibrating sounds is "1" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound is "1", there is a high possibility that the setting value "1" is set.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the number of times of vibration, the first hybrid performance composed of short vibration and vibration sound of the number of times according to the determination result is started from the start of the special figure fluctuation performance to be started from now. Let

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines not to execute the hybrid performance in the hybrid performance execution determination, it determines whether or not to execute the advance notice performance suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed. Perform the advance notice effect execution determination. The advance notice effect is composed of short vibrations related to the hybrid effect. In addition, there are three types of the number of short vibrations related to the notice effect, ie, 2, 4, and 6 times, and the possibility of executing the big winning game increases as the number of short vibrations increases.

The notice effect execution determination is executed with reference to a notice effect execution determination table. The notice effect execution determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), as the notice effect execution determination table, the notice effect execution determination table associated with the SP big hit fluctuation, the notice effect execution determination table associated with the L big hit change, and the SP loss change A notice effect execution determination table associated with a notice effect execution determination table associated with L loss variation, a notice effect execution determination table associated with N loss change, and a notice effect execution determination table associated with normal loss change A notice effect execution determination table is provided. Each notice effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of the notice effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 59(A).

According to the notice performance execution determination table, it may be determined that "prediction performance is to be executed" both in the case of the big win variation and in the case of the loss variation. That is, when the advance notice effect is executed, it may be a big win or a loss. Therefore, there is a possibility that the notice performance will be in a jackpot game state by stopping display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the big win in the special figure variation performance corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure variation start command. It is a production that suggests that. In addition, in the case of the reach fluctuation and in the case of the non-reach fluctuation (normal loss fluctuation), it may be determined to "execute the notice effect". That is, when the advance notice effect is executed, it may or may not develop into ready-to-win. Therefore, the advance notice production is a production that suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a reach with the special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure fluctuation start command.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the notice effect in the notice effect execution determination table, it subsequently performs the notice effect vibration frequency determination for determining the number of short vibrations related to the notice effect. The determination of the number of times of notice effect vibrations is executed with reference to a table for determining the number of times of notice effect vibrations. The notice effect vibration frequency determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. As shown in FIG. 59(B), as the notice effect vibration frequency determination table, the notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, the notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, A notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with SP loss variation, a notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with L loss variation, a notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with N loss variation, and a normal loss A table for judging the number of times of notice effect vibration associated with the fluctuation is provided. Each notice effect vibration frequency determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for the number of short vibrations (2 times, 4 times, 6 times) related to each notice effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 59(B). is set.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the number of times of notice performance vibration, it starts the notice performance composed of short vibrations of the number of times corresponding to the determination result from the start of the special figure fluctuation performance to be started from now on.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment, a hybrid effect is executed by the number of interlocking vibrations (long vibration, short vibration) and sound (vibration sound), so that a jackpot game is executed. In addition to suggesting that there is a possibility that the game will be played, information about the set value is also suggested. In addition, regarding the hybrid performance, when the number of vibrations and the number of sounds match, it suggests that there is a high possibility that the setting value corresponds to that number of times. When they do not match, it suggests that the setting value corresponds to the number of times of vibration, so that attention can be drawn to the vibration sound in the hybrid effect. Furthermore, when the short vibration and the vibration sound are interlocked, information about the set value is suggested by the number of times as the hybrid effect, while when it is composed only of the short vibration, the jackpot game is executed according to the number of times as the notice effect. Since the possibility of being played is suggested, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. The specific mode and duration of vibration and the specific mode and duration of sound related to the hybrid effect in which vibration and sound are interlocked are not limited to those in the second embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the execution timing of the hybrid effect is not limited to when the special figure reservation occurs or when the special figure variable display is started as in the second embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the relationship between the number of vibrations and sounds related to the hybrid effect and the content of the information about the setting value suggested by the number of times is not limited to the second embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first effect button 40k is configured to vibrate, and the hybrid effect is executed by vibrating the first effect button 40k. can be changed to For example, the second effect button 41k may be configured to vibrate, and a hybrid effect may be executed by interlocking the vibration and sound of the second effect button 41k. Alternatively, a non-operable movable body such as the first production button 40k and the second production button 41k may be configured to vibrate, and the vibration and sound of the movable body may be interlocked to execute a hybrid production.

Furthermore, the long vibrating sound related to the look-ahead hybrid is a sound representing long vibration, and the short vibrating sound related to the hybrid is a sound representing short vibration. For example, the sound may be composed of the same type of notification sound (beep, beep, beep, beep, beep), and simply correspond to the duration of the long vibration or short vibration.

In addition, the second hybrid effect is configured such that the number of vibrations is one more than the number of vibration sounds, and the number of vibrations suggests the set value, but the number of vibration sounds is greater than the number of vibrations. It may be configured such that the number of vibrating voices, one more time, suggests the set value.

Furthermore, for example, a hybrid effect (first hybrid effect) composed of a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of long vibration and long vibration sound, and a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of short vibration and short vibration sound. A hybrid performance (second hybrid performance) to be executed is executable, and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the first hybrid performance is executed than when the second hybrid performance is executed. Alternatively, it may be constructed such that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the second hybrid effect is executed than when the first hybrid effect is executed. Also, a set value such as a set value of "5" or a set value of "6", which is more advantageous to the player when the first hybrid effect is executed than when the second hybrid effect is executed, is set. For example, the set value "5" or the set value "6" is set so that the possibility that the second hybrid effect is executed is higher than the case where the first hybrid effect is executed. It may be configured such that the possibility that the set values advantageous to the player are set is increased. These can be applied to both or one of the hybrid effect and the look-ahead hybrid effect.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a third embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko machine PY3 according to the third embodiment, when the prepaid card is taken out from the card unit CU in which the prepaid card is inserted, an effect suggesting information about the set value (set value suggesting effect) is executed. There is

FIG. 60 is a perspective view integrally representing the pachinko gaming machine PY3 and the card unit CU according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, the card unit CU is adjacent to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine PY3. A prepaid card insertion hole CUh for inserting a prepaid card is formed in the lower portion of the card unit CU.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment includes a return button 43k as operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. FIG. 61 is a plan view of the upper plate 34 of the pachinko game machine PY3 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, the return button 43k is arranged on the right side of the supplied ball storage hole 34A on the upper surface of the upper plate 34, and is configured so as to be able to be pressed down similarly to the first effect button 40k. When the return button 43k is operated, the prepaid card comes out (is returned) from the prepaid card insertion hole CUh.

The return button 43k is connected to the return button sensor 43a. FIG. 62 is a block diagram of the game control board side of the pachinko game machine PY3 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, the return button sensor 43a is connected to the game control board 100. As shown in FIG. When the return button sensor 43a detects an operation to the return button 43k, it outputs to the game control board 100 a signal (return button detection signal) indicating that the return button 43k has been operated as detection content. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the game control microcomputer 101 detects the return button detection signal, it transmits a command (return button operation command) indicating that the return button 43k has been operated to the payout control board 170. . When the payout control board 170 receives the return button operation command from the game control microcomputer 101, it gives out the prepaid card.

In addition, in the third embodiment, in the ending production corresponding to the ending of the jackpot game related to winning the jackpot in the normal game state, the so-called "first hit", there is a prepaid forgetting prevention production that calls attention to forgetting to take out the prepaid card. executed. The prepaid card forgetting prevention effect is performed by an image displayed on the display unit 50 a and a sound output from the speaker 52 . In the following, the image related to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect will be referred to as "prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect image", and the sound related to the prepaid forget-to-take prevent effect will be referred to as "prepaid forget-to-take preventive effect sound".

Rendering modes of the prepaid card forgetting to take prevention rendering include a normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value, and a special mode that suggests the information about the set value. In the third embodiment, as the information about the setting value, a setting value that is relatively high and advantageous to the player, specifically a setting value of "5" is set, and a setting value of "6" is set. is set. In the following description, the special aspect of the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect may be referred to as a "set value suggesting effect". Further, the special mode suggesting that the setting value "5" is set is the "first special mode", and the special mode suggesting that the setting value "6" is set is the "second special mode". The prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the first special mode is referred to as the "first set value suggestion effect", and the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the second special mode is referred to as the "second set value suggestion effect". It is sometimes called

Here, the effect content of the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing how the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect is executed. Specifically, FIG. 63(A) is a diagram showing a state in which the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the normal mode is being executed, and FIG. FIG. 63(C) is a diagram showing how the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect (second set value suggesting effect) of the second special mode is being executed. .

As shown in FIGS. 63(A) to 63(C), the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the normal mode, the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the first special mode, and the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the second special mode , the same prepaid card forgetting prevention effect image (prepaid card forgetting to take prevention effect image G50) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The display content of the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect image G50 can be appropriately set within the range of calling attention to forgetting to take out the prepaid card. The prepaid card forgetting to take prevention effect image G50 includes the sentence "Please be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card or have it stolen."

In addition, different prepaid forgetting to take prevention effect sounds from the speaker 52 for the normal mode prepaid forgetting to take preventing effect, the first special mode prepaid forgetting to take preventing effect, and the second special mode forgetting to take prepaid taking preventing effect. output. Specifically, the prepaid-forgotten-to-take-preventing effect sound related to the prepaid-forgotten-to-take-off prevention effect of the normal mode is composed of a male voice saying "Please be careful", and is related to the prepaid-to-be-forgotten-to-take-off preventive effect of the first special mode. The prepaid card forgetting prevention effect sound consists of a female voice saying, "Beware of forgetting to take the card or theft." Please be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card or have it stolen." It consists of a female voice.

In this way, the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect may be executed. is to be executed in a normal manner or in a special manner. Whether to execute in the normal mode or in the special mode is determined by the special mode execution determination.

Special mode execution determination is executed with reference to a special mode execution determination table. The special mode execution determination table is associated with set values. The special mode execution determination table is associated with set values. That is, as the special mode execution determination table, a special mode execution determination table associated with a setting value of "6", a special mode execution determination table associated with a setting value of "5", and a setting value of "1". and a special mode execution determination associated with the value "4".

FIG. 64 shows a configuration example of the special mode execution determination table. Each special mode execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the prepaid forgetting to take prevention effect in the special mode becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG.

According to the special mode execution determination table, the selection rate for "execute the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect in a special mode" is higher in the case of the set value "6" than in the case of the set value "5". That is, the special aspect of the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect is more likely to be executed in the case of the set value "6" than in the case of the set value "5". Further, in the case of the set values "1" to "4", the "perform a prepaid card forgetting prevention effect in a special mode" is not selected. This is because, in the third embodiment, when the set value is "5" or when the set value is "6", it is suggested that the set value is set.

At step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that an ending command relating to the ending of the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning in the normal game state called "first hit" has been received, and the step S4318 follows the effect mode setting process. Then, the processing related to the special mode execution determination is performed. The effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the setting value in the processing related to the special mode execution determination, and performs the special mode execution determination based on the special mode execution determination table associated with the confirmed setting value.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that ``prepaid card forgetting prevention performance is executed in a special mode'' in the special mode execution determination, the prepaid card forgetting prevention performance is executed in a special mode at a predetermined timing in the ending performance. If the set value "5" is set, the production control microcomputer 121 outputs a female voice saying "Please be careful not to forget to take it or have it stolen" from the speaker 52, and the set value "6" is set. If so, the speaker 52 outputs a female voice saying "Be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card or have it stolen." On the other hand, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that ``prepaid card forgetting prevention performance is not executed in a special mode'' in the special mode execution determination, the prepaid card forgetting prevention performance is executed in a normal mode at a predetermined timing in the ending performance. . In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a male voice saying “Please be careful” from the speaker 52 .

Note that the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special mode execution determination is to execute the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect in a special mode, even when the special mode execution determination is to not execute the prepaid card forgetting to take preventive effect in a special mode. , the ending effect start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 in the aforementioned ending effect start process. Here, when the ending effect of the jackpot game based on the winning of the jackpot in the normal game state called "first hit" is executed, the effect image G50 for preventing forgetting to take the prepaid card is displayed at a predetermined timing of the ending effect. The ending effect start command shown is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. The ending effect start command set in the output buffer is output to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing in step S4004. When the image control board 140 receives the ending effect start command, the image control board 140 performs the ending effect of the effect indicated by the ending effect start command on the display section 50a.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment, when the jackpot game that enters the high base game state after that ends, the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect of the special mode is executed, Information about the setting value, in particular, it may suggest that a setting value of "5", which is a relatively high setting value, is set, and that a setting value of "6" is set. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the prevention of forgetting to take out a prepaid card, which is generally not noticed so much, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Modified example of the third embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. The specific effect content related to the set value suggesting effect is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the third embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect is executed in the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect. It may be configured to be executable by image and sound, and the set value suggesting effect may be performed in the effect. In addition, the sound content of the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect sound is a warning against forgetting to take the prepaid card, but it may be changed to a sound content that is not related to the warning such as forgetting to take the prepaid card. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the type of voice related to the setting value suggesting effect is the same as the female voice when the setting value is set to "5" and when the setting value is set to "6". Yes, the content of the voice is different, but the type of voice related to the setting value suggestion effect is different, and the content of the voice is configured to be the same, so that the setting value "5" and the setting value "6" can be distinguished. can be

In addition, in the third embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is performed by the sound output from the speaker 52, but the effect device that performs the set value suggestion effect is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, an image displayed on the image display device 50, an operation by the board movable body 55k, or light emission by the frame lamp 53 may be used to perform the set value suggesting effect. Alternatively, the set value suggestion effect may be executed depending on the display mode or display position of the prepaid card forgetting to take prevention effect image G50. For example, the colors of the normal mode, the colors of the first special mode, and the colors of the second special mode may be different from each other. Alternatively, the size of the normal mode, the size of the first special mode, and the size of the second special mode may be different from each other.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the prepaid forgetting to take prevention effect is distinguished between the normal mode and the special mode depending on the effect content of the prepaid forgetting to take preventing effect sound. , the normal mode and the special mode may be distinguished from each other. For example, when the prepaid card forgetting to take prevention effect of the normal mode is executed, only the prepaid card forgetting to take preventing effect image is displayed on the display unit 50a. A prevention effect image may be displayed on the display unit 50 a , and a sound effect for preventing forgetting to take the prepaid card may be output from the speaker 52 . Further, when the prepaid card forgetting to take prevention effect of the normal mode is executed, only the prepaid card forgetting to take preventing effect sound is output from the speaker 52, and in the prepaid card forgetting to take preventing effect of the special mode, the same prepaid card forgetting to take prevention effect is executed. An effect sound may be output from the speaker 52, and an effect image for preventing the user from forgetting to take the prepaid card may be displayed on the display unit 50a.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value "5", which is a relatively high setting value, and the setting value "6" are set. However, this information is not limited to the third embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as the information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggesting effect, only one of the setting value "5", which is a relatively high setting value, and the setting value "6" is set. can be set to Moreover, in addition to or instead of setting the setting value "5", which is a relatively high setting value, and setting the setting value "6", all or part of the other setting values are The fact that it is set may also be information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggesting effect. Furthermore, rather than a specific set value, all or all of an odd set value, an even set value, a relatively high set value, and a relatively low set value Any one of them may be used as the information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, information about the set value is suggested by using the prepaid forgetting prevention effect. May suggest information. For example, at the ending of a jackpot game, immediately after or immediately before the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect, the effect related to the company that manufactures the pachinko game machine PY3 (for example, display of CI (corporate identity)) can be executed. , the effect may be used to suggest information about the set value. In this case, for example, when the CI is displayed, a voice representing the company and a voice not representing the company are output. You may make it mutually different in the case of a 2nd special aspect. Also, the display contents and display position of the CI display may be different among the normal mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode.

Further, the effect (display of CI) related to the company that manufactures the pachinko game machine PY3 can be executed, but the set value suggesting effect is not executed in the effect related to the company that manufactures the pachinko game machine PY3. That is, for the production related to the company that manufactures the pachinko machine PY3, the normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value) related to the prepaid forgetting to take prevention effect in the third embodiment. Only such aspects may be provided. Further, the effect (display of CI) related to the company that manufactures the pachinko machine PY3 may be executable only at the so-called "first hit" ending, similar to the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect. Unlike the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect, the ending of the jackpot game other than the so-called "first win" ending may be executable. That is, in a jackpot game when a jackpot decision is made in a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state, the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect is not executed, but the pachinko game machine PY3 is manufactured. A company-related presentation (CI display) may be executed.

In addition, in the ending related to the so-called "first hit", an effect (addiction prevention effect) that encourages prevention of so-called "addiction" may be executed immediately before or immediately after the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect. In this case, in the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect, the set value suggestion effect may be executed as in the third embodiment, but in the addiction prevention effect, the set value suggestion effect is not executed. Only a mode such as the normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the setting value) related to the prepaid forgetting to take prevention effect in the third embodiment may be provided. Conversely, in the addiction prevention effect, the set value suggestion effect can be executed like the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect according to the third embodiment, but in the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, even if the set value suggestion effect is not executed. good. Also, the addiction prevention effect may be executable only in the so-called "first win" ending, similar to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect. The ending of the jackpot game other than this may be configured to be executable. That is, in the jackpot game when the jackpot determination in the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state is determined to be a jackpot, the prepaid card forgetting prevention effect is not executed, but the immersion prevention effect is executed. Also good.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a fourth embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

Pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment, after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed without winning the jackpot, that is, the so-called "addiction number" to count. Then, when the number of addictions reaches a predetermined number, a predetermined sound effect may be output from the speaker 52 based on the set value. This sound effect is common for any number of times of addiction and any setting value, and suggests information about the setting value according to the number of times of addiction. Here, the relationship between the number of hits when a sound effect is output and the information related to the set value suggesting that the sound effect was output at that hit count will be described.

Specifically, when the number of times of addiction is three digits or less and the last two digits are "66", the number of times of addiction is 66 times, 166 times, 266 times, 366 times, 466 times, 566 times, 666 times. If the sound effect is output when the number of times is 1, 766, 866, or 966, the output of the sound effect suggests that the setting value "6" is set. In other words, when the setting value "6" is set, the number of times of addiction is 3 digits or less and the lower two digits are 66 times, 166 times consisting of the number of times "6" of the setting value "6" continues. times, 266 times, 366 times, 466 times, 566 times, 666 times, 766 times, 866 times, or 966 times, sound effects may be output.

Further, when the number of times of addiction is the number of times of three digits or less and the last two digits are "55", specifically, the number of times of addiction is 55 times, 155 times, 255 times, 355 times, 455 times, 555 times. , 655 times, 755 times, 855 times, or 955 times, the output of the sound effect suggests that the setting value "5" is set. In other words, when the setting value “5” is set, the number of times of addiction is 3 digits or less and the lower two digits are 55 times, 155 times, which is the number of times “5” of the setting value “5” times, 255 times, 355 times, 455 times, 555 times, 655 times, 755 times, 855 times, or 955 times, the sound effect may be output.

Furthermore, when the number of times of addiction is the number of times of three digits or less and the last two digits are "44", specifically, the number of times of addiction is 44 times, 144 times, 244 times, 344 times, 444 times, 544 times. , 644 times, 744 times, 844 times, or 944 times, the output of the sound effect suggests that the setting value "4" is set. In other words, when the setting value "4" is set, the number of times of addiction is 3 digits or less and the lower two digits are 44 times, 144 times, which is the number of times "4" of the setting value "4" times, 244 times, 344 times, 444 times, 544 times, 644 times, 744 times, 844 times, or 944 times, sound effects may be output.

In addition, when the number of times of addiction is the number of times of three digits or less and the number of times of the last two digits is "33", specifically, the number of times of addiction is 33 times, 133 times, 233 times, 333 times, 433 times, 533 times , 633 times, 733 times, 833 times, or 933 times, the output of the sound effect suggests that the setting value "3" is set. In other words, when the setting value "3" is set, the number of times of addiction is 3 digits or less, and the lower two digits are 33 times, 133 times, which is the number of times "3" of the setting value "3" continues. times, 233 times, 333 times, 433 times, 533 times, 633 times, 733 times, 833 times, or 933 times, the sound effect may be output.

Furthermore, when the number of times of addiction is the number of times of three digits or less and the last two digits are "22", specifically, the number of times of addiction is 22 times, 122 times, 222 times, 322 times, 422 times, 522 times , 622 times, 722 times, 822 times, or 922 times, the output of the sound effect suggests that the setting value "2" is set. In other words, when the setting value “2” is set, the number of times of addiction is 3 digits or less and the lower two digits are 22 times, 122 times, which is the number of times “2” of the setting value “2” continues times, 222 times, 322 times, 422 times, 522 times, 622 times, 722 times, 822 times, or 922 times, the sound effect may be output.

In addition, when the number of times of addiction is the number of times of three digits or less and the last two digits are "11", specifically, the number of times of addiction is 11 times, 111 times, 211 times, 311 times, 411 times, 511 times. , 611 times, 711 times, 811 times, or 911 times, the output of the sound effect suggests that the set value "1" is set. In other words, when the setting value "1" is set, the number of times of addiction is 3 digits or less, and the lower two digits are 11 times, 111 times, consisting of the number of consecutive "1"s of the setting value "1". times, 211 times, 311 times, 411 times, 511 times, 611 times, 711 times, 811 times, or 911 times, sound effects may be output.

Further, when the sound effect is output when the number of addictive hits is "123", the output of the sound effect is set to the setting value "1", the setting value "2", or the setting It suggests that one of the values "3" is set. In other words, if any of the relatively low setting values of setting value “1”, setting value “2”, or setting value “3” is set, these setting values “1”, “2” , and 3, a sound effect may be output. Furthermore, if a sound effect is output when the number of addictive hits is "456", the output of the sound effect will be the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value constituting the number related to this number of times. It suggests that one of the values "6" is set. In other words, if any of the relatively high setting values "4", "5", or "6" is set, these setting values "4", "5" , and 5, the sound effect may be output.

Further, if a sound effect is output when the number of addictive hits is "135", the output of the sound effect is set to the set value "1", the set value "3", or the set value "3" constituting an odd number related to this number of times. It suggests that one of the values "5" is set. In other words, if either a setting value of '1', a setting value of '3', or a setting value of '5' is set, then these odd setting values of '1', '3', and '5' A sound effect may be output when the number of times is "135". Furthermore, if a sound effect is output when the number of times of addiction is "246", the output of the sound effect is set to a setting value of "2", a setting value of "4", or a setting value of even numbers corresponding to this number of times. It suggests that one of the values "6" is set. In other words, if either setting value "2", setting value "4", or setting value "6" is set, these even setting values "2", "4" and "6" A sound effect may be output when the number of times is "246".

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine PY4 determines that it has received the special figure variation start command in step S4305, after finishing the special figure variation effect start processing in step S4306, the predetermined "1" is added to the counter value of the addiction counting counter provided in the area. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine PY4 determines that it has received the special figure variation start command in step S4305, after finishing the special figure variation effect start processing in step S4306, a predetermined "1" is added to the counter value of the addiction counting counter provided in the area. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it has received the opening command in step S4313, it clears the counter value of the addiction counter after completing the opening effect start process in step S4314. In this way, the production control microcomputer 121 adds "1" to the counter value of the addiction counting counter at the start of the special figure variation display, and clears the counter value of the addiction counting counter at the start of the jackpot game, thereby increasing the number of times of addiction. can be counted, and the number of times of addiction can be specified by checking the addiction counting counter.

In this manner, a sound effect suggesting information about the set value is output according to the combination of the set value and the number of times of addiction. Hereinafter, the output of this sound effect will be referred to as "set value suggesting effect". In the fourth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the set value suggestion effect based on the set value and the number of times of addiction. Whether or not to execute the setting value suggesting effect is determined by the setting value suggesting effect execution determination.

The set value suggestion effect execution determination is executed with reference to a set value suggestion effect execution determination table. The setting value suggestion effect execution determination table is associated with the setting value and the number of times of addiction. The set value suggestion effect execution determination table is first associated with set values. That is, as the set value suggesting effect execution determination table, a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value "6" and a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value "5" are set. A setting value suggestion performance execution determination table associated with the value "4", a setting value suggestion performance execution determination table associated with the setting value "3", and a setting value suggestion associated with the setting value "2". An effect execution determination table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value "1" are provided.

FIG. 65(A) shows a configuration example of a set value suggestion performance execution determination table associated with the set value "6", and FIG. 65(B) shows a set value suggestion associated with the set value "5". Fig. 66(A) shows a configuration example of a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with a setting value "4", and Fig. 66(B) shows a configuration example of a setting value "4". 67(A) shows a configuration example of a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value "2", FIG. 67B shows a configuration example of a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "1".

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value "6" further includes a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "66 times". A table, a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "166 times", a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "246 times", and the number of times of addiction "266 times" A set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "366 times", and a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "456 times" A table, a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "466 times", a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "566 times", and the number of times of addiction "666 times" A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "766 times", and a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "866 times" There is a table, and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "966 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the setting value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the set value "5" further includes a set value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "55 times". A table, a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "135 times", a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "155 times", A set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "355 times", and a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "455 times" A table, a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "456 times", a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "555 times", and a number of times of addiction "655 times" A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with it, a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "755 times", and a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "855 times". There is a table, and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "955 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the setting value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the set value "4" further includes a set value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "44". A table, a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "144 times", a set value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictive times "244 times", and a table corresponding to the number of addictive times "246 times" A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with it, a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "344 times", and a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "444 times". A table, a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "456 times", a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "544 times", and a number of addiction "644 times" A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "744 times", and a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "844 times" There is a table, and a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "944 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value "3" further includes a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "33 times". A table, a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "123 times", a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "133 times", A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "233 times", and a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "355 times" A table, a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "433 times", a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "533 times", and a number of times of addiction "633 times" A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with it, a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "733 times", and a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "833 times". There are a table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "933 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the setting value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the set value "2" further includes a set value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "22". A table, a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "122 times", a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addicting "123 times", A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "246 times", and a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "322 times" A table, a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "422 times", a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "522 times", and a number of times of addiction "622 times" A set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "722 times", and a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "822 times" There is a table, and a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "922 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the setting value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the set value "1" further includes a set value suggestive effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "11 times". A table, a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "111 times", a table of setting value suggestion effect execution determination corresponding to the number of times of addiction "123 times", and a number of times of addiction "135 times" A set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "211 times", and a set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "311 times" A table, a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "411 times", a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "511 times", and a number of addiction "611 times" A setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the set value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "711 times", and a setting value suggesting effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "811 times" There are a table and a setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of times of addiction "911 times".

Each setting value suggesting effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. is set.

According to the setting value suggestion effect execution determination table, the number of times of addiction when suggesting each setting value (the number of times of addiction when the numbers related to each setting value are consecutive lower two digits) are as follows as the number of times of addiction increases. The selection rate for "execute setting value suggestion effect" increases. In addition, the same selection rate is set for "execute setting value suggesting effect" related to the number of hits "123 times" for setting value "1", setting value "2", and setting value "3". Similarly, for the set value "4", the set value "5", and the set value "6", the same selection rate is set for "execute setting value suggesting effect" related to the number of addictions "456 times". . In addition, the same selection rate is set for "execute setting value suggesting effect" for the number of times of addiction "135 times" for setting value "1", setting value "3", and setting value "5". Similarly, for the set value "2", the set value "4", and the set value "6", the same selection rate is set for "execute the setting value suggesting effect" related to the number of times of addiction "246 times". .

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop command is received in step S4307, the special figure fluctuation production end processing in step S4308 is followed by the processing related to the setting value suggestion production determination. The effect control microcomputer 121 first confirms the set value in the processing related to the set value suggestion effect determination. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the number of times of addiction, and the number of times of addiction that can execute the setting value suggestion effect with the confirmed setting value, that is, the setting value suggestion effect associated with the confirmed setting value It is determined whether or not it is the addiction count associated with the execution determination table. Here, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value suggestion effect can be executed with the confirmed setting value, the setting value suggestion effect associated with the confirmed setting value and the addiction frequency is executed. Based on the determination table, a setting value suggestion effect execution determination is performed.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the set value suggesting effect is to be executed" in the set value suggesting effect execution determination, it causes the set value suggesting effect to be executed. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a sound effect suggesting information about the set value from the speaker 52 when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed.

Next, a specific example of the set value suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing how the setting value suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing how the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the special figure fluctuation production, and FIG. 68 (B) is the end of the special figure fluctuation production, FIG. 68(C) is a diagram showing how the temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a manner indicating a failure, and FIG. 68(C) is immediately after FIG. A diagram showing that the set value suggestion effect is being executed while the EZ3 stop display is performed, FIG. It is a figure which shows. In addition, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern related to the special figure variable display in which the set value suggestion effect is executed is reachless loss variation.

As shown in FIG. 68(A), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed as a special figure variation production in the display unit 50a, and when the special figure variation production is about to end, the display shown in FIG. 68(B) As shown, the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a manner indicating a loss. Then, when the special figure fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the performance control board 120 at the start of the special figure stop display, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines "execute the set value suggestion performance" in the set value suggestion performance execution determination. Then, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure, and a predetermined effect sound is output from the speaker 52 to execute the set value suggesting effect. Incidentally, when it is not determined in the setting value suggesting effect execution execution determination that "the set value suggesting effect is to be executed", the predetermined effect sound is not output from the speaker 52, and the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a manner indicating a failure. A stop display is performed. Then, in response to the start of the next special figure variable display, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the next special figure variation effect is started, and the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is also started. .

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect of outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 52 is executed at a specific number of times of addiction, and different contents are produced according to the number of times of addiction. Since the information about the set value is suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game even when it is difficult to win the jackpot, and to make the player pay attention to the number of times of addiction, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. Furthermore, in the case of suggesting each set value, as the number of times of addiction increases, the possibility of executing the set value suggestion effect increases. can. In addition, as information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value itself, whether the setting value is an odd number, whether the setting value is an even number, whether the setting value is relatively high, and whether the setting value is relatively low Since it is provided that it is a set value, the variation of the setting value suggesting effect is increased, and it is possible to prevent boredom with the set value suggesting effect.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect is performed by the sound output from the speaker 52, but the effect device that performs the setting value suggesting effect is not particularly limited and may be appropriately changed. For example, an image displayed on the image display device 50, an operation by the board movable body 55k, or light emission by the frame lamp 53 may be used to perform the set value suggesting effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine PY4, the categories of information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggesting effect are the setting value itself, the setting value being an odd number, the setting value being an even number, and a relatively high setting value. and relatively low settings, and the categories of information about these settings are suggested using common sound effects, but the settings themselves, the settings are odd different sound effects may be used to indicate that the setting value is even, that the setting value is an even number, that the setting value is relatively high, and that the setting value is relatively low. That is, the setting value itself (setting value “1” to setting value “6”) is suggested using sound effect A, and the setting value is an odd number (setting value “1”, setting value “3”, setting value “5”). ) is suggested using sound effect B, and that the setting values are even numbers (setting value “2”, setting value “4”, setting value “6”) is indicated using sound effect C, A relatively high set value (set value “4”, a set value “5”, a set value “6”) is suggested using sound effect D, and a relatively low set value (set value “1 , setting value "3", setting value "5") may be suggested using sound effect E.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY4, the setting value suggesting effect is performed at the time of special symbol stop display (at the time of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3), but the execution timing of the set value suggesting effect is not limited to this. At the start of the special figure fluctuation display (at the start of the fluctuation display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3), etc., if it is within the special figure variable display (within the special figure fluctuation production), it may be changed as appropriate.

Also, the number of times of addiction at which the setting value suggestion effect may be executed is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when suggesting the setting value itself (setting value “1” to setting value “6”), if the setting value is “1”, the setting value “ If the set value is "2", when the number of hits is "22 times" and "222 times", if the set value is "3", the number of hits is "33 times" and "333 times", and if the set value is "4". For example, when the number of addictions is "44 times" and "444 times", if the setting value is "5", the number of times of addiction is "55 times" and "555 times", and if the setting value is "6", the number of times of addiction is When all numbers related to the number of times of addiction are composed of the setting value such as "66 times" and "666 times", the setting value itself (setting value "1" to setting value "6") is suggested. can be In addition, when the set value suggests that the number is odd, it is not limited to the case where the number of times of addiction is "135 times", but the number of times of addiction such as "315 times" or "531 times" is set at least. You may choose to include all odd numbers of values. Furthermore, when suggesting that the setting value is an even number, it is not limited to the case where the number of times of addiction is "246 times", but the number of times of addiction is not limited to "426 times" or "642 times". At least all even numbers of set values may be included. Also, when suggesting a relatively high setting value, the number of times of addiction is not limited to "456 times", but the number of times of addiction is "564 times" or "645 times". At least all relatively high setting values may be included. Furthermore, when suggesting a relatively low set value, it is not limited to the case where the number of times of addiction is "123 times", but the number of times of addiction is "231 times", "312 times", etc. It may suffice to include all setting values whose numbers are at least relatively low.

In addition, in the pachinko machine PY4, the categories of information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggesting effect are the setting value itself, the setting value being an odd number, the setting value being an even number, and a relatively high setting value. However, the category of information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect is not limited to these, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, any one of these categories, or any of these categories. Further, for example, as a category of information related to the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect, at least the set value "1", which is the most disadvantageous for the player, or the set value "5" or the set value "5", which is highly advantageous to the player. 6” may be provided instead of the category according to the fourth embodiment, or in addition to all or part of the category according to the fourth embodiment. In addition, as a category of information related to setting values, there is a setting value itself, and all setting values from setting value "1" to setting value "6" are provided as the setting value itself. It may be part of the set value, such as only the value "1".

In addition, the number of times of special figure variable display that is executed without winning the jackpot after the jackpot game is set as the number of times of addiction, but the number of times of the special figure variable display that is executed without winning the jackpot in the normal game state is set. May be set. That is, when a game state advantageous to the player, such as a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state, is set after the jackpot game, the termination conditions related to the game state advantageous to the player are terminated and the normal It may be set to the number of times the special figure variable display is executed without winning the jackpot after falling into the game state.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a fifth embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment is basically a left-handed game state, such as a high-probability high-base game state and a low-probability high-base game state, which is basically a right-handed game state. When shifting to the state, a performance (left-handed performance) is performed to prompt the player to switch from right-handed to left-handed, in other words, perform left-handed and shoot a game ball toward the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加

Here, the left-handed performance will be described. The left-handed effect is performed by an image displayed on the display section 50 a and a sound output from the speaker 52 . The left-handed effect is executed when the normal effect mode is set by shifting from a game state that basically hits right, such as a high-probability high-base game state and a low-probability high-base game state, to a normal game state. be. In the following description, the image associated with the left-handed effect will be referred to as "left-handed effect image", and the sound associated with the left-handed effect will be referred to as "left-handed effect sound".

The left-handed effect has a normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value, and a special mode that suggests the information about the set value. In the fifth embodiment, as information about the setting value, it is set that a setting value that is relatively high and advantageous to the player, specifically, a setting value of "5" or a setting value of "6" is set. there is

The content of the left-handed effect image is the same for the left-handed effect of the normal mode and the left-handed effect of the special mode, but the content of the left-handed effect sound is different. That is, the left-handed effect image is composed of the same image including a left-pointing arrow and the characters "left-handed" in both the normal mode and the special mode, as will be described later, and the left-handed performance sound is composed of " In the special mode, it is composed of a female voice saying "Please switch back to left-handed."

Also, in the left-handed effect of the normal mode, the left-handed effect sound is output five times. On the other hand, in the left-handed effect of the special mode, there are cases where the left-handed effect sound is output five times and six times. Specifically, when the setting value "5" is suggested, the left-handed effect sound is output five times, and when the setting value "6" is suggested, the left-handed effect sound is output six times.

In the following description, the left-hand hitting effect of the special mode may also be referred to as a "set value suggesting effect". Further, a special mode suggesting a setting value of "5" is called a "first special mode", a special mode suggesting a setting value of "6" is called a "second special mode", and The hitting effect is sometimes referred to as a "first set value suggestive effect", and the left-hand hitting effect of the second special mode is sometimes referred to as a "second set value suggestive effect".

Here, a specific example of the left-handed effect will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing how the left-handed effect is executed. Specifically, FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing how the normal mode left-handed effect is executed, and FIG. 69(B) shows the left-handed performance (first set value suggestion effect) of the first special mode FIG. 69(C) is a diagram showing a state in which a left-handed hitting effect (second set value suggesting effect) of the second special mode is being executed.

When the game is executed in the high probability high base game state, the performance is executed in the variable probability performance mode, and when the game is executed in the normal game state, the performance is executed in the normal performance mode, so that the high probability high base game is played. In accordance with the shift from the state to the normal game state, the variable probability performance mode is shifted to the normal performance mode. When the game is executed in the low probability high base game state, the performance is executed in the time reduction performance mode, so that the time reduction performance mode is changed to the normal performance mode in response to the shift from the low probability high base game state to the normal game state. transition to Then, when the mode is shifted to the normal effect mode, regardless of the effect mode of the left-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. A left-handed effect image G41 including characters is displayed.

Here, if the effect mode of the executed left-handed effect is the normal mode, as shown in FIG. A voice is output from the speaker 52 five times. Also, if the effect mode of the executed left-handed effect is the first special mode, as shown in FIG. The effect sound is output from the speaker 52 five times. Furthermore, if the effect mode of the executed left-handed effect is the second special mode, as shown in FIG. The effect sound is output from the speaker 52 six times. Note that in any of the left-handed effect of the normal mode, the left-handed effect of the first special mode, and the left-handed effect of the second special mode, the left-handed effect image G41 is displayed while the left-handed effect sound is being output. When the output of the left-handed effect sound is finished, the left-handed effect image G41 is erased.

In this way, the left-handed effect may be executed, but in the fifth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the left-handed effect in the normal mode based on the set value when executing the left-handed effect. It is determined whether to execute with or in a special mode. Whether to execute in the normal mode or in the special mode is determined by the special mode execution determination.

Special mode execution determination is executed with reference to a special mode execution determination table. The special mode execution determination table is associated with set values. The special mode execution determination table is associated with set values. That is, as the special mode execution determination table, a special mode execution determination table associated with a setting value of "6", a special mode execution determination table associated with a setting value of "5", and a setting value of "1". and a special mode execution determination associated with the value "4".

FIG. 70 shows a configuration example of the special mode execution determination table. Each special mode execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the left-handed effect in the special mode is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG.

According to the special mode execution determination table, the selection rate for "perform a left-handed effect in a special mode" is higher in the case of the set value "6" than in the case of the set value "5". That is, the left-handed effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed when the set value is "6" than when the set value is "5". Also, in the case of the set values "1" to "4", the "perform a left-handed effect in a special mode" is not selected. This is because, in the fifth embodiment, when the set value is "5" or when the set value is "6", it is suggested that the set value is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the game state command is received in step S4309, the game state setting process in step S4310 is followed by a process related to special mode execution determination. Effect control microcomputer 121, in the process related to the special mode execution determination, first, in the game state setting process, the game state flag "01H" indicating the above-mentioned high probability high base game state or the low probability high base game state It is determined whether or not the game state flag "02H" indicating the game state is changed to the game state flag "00H" indicating the normal game state. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the game state flag has been changed to "00H", it next confirms the set value, and makes a special mode execution determination based on the special mode execution determination table associated with the confirmed set value. I do.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the left-hand hitting effect is to be executed in the special mode", the left-hand hitting effect is executed in the special mode. If the set value "5" is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a female voice saying "Return to left-handed hitting" five times from the speaker 52, and the set value "6" is set. If so, the speaker 52 outputs six times a voice of a female voice saying "Return to left-handed hitting." On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the left-hand hitting effect is not executed in the special mode", the left-hand hitting effect is executed in the normal mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a male voice saying "Please return to left-handed" from the speaker 52 five times.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that "the left-handed production is executed in the special mode" in the special mode execution determination, if the set value "5" is set, the special mode related to the set value "5" A left-handed performance start command indicating that a left-handed performance is to be performed is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124, and if the set value “6” is set, a special mode left-handed performance related to the set value “6” is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the left-handed effect is not executed in the special mode", the left-handed effect start command indicating that the normal mode left-handed effect is performed is stored in the effect RAM 124. Set to output buffer. Each left-handed effect start command set in the output buffer is output to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing in step S4004. Each left-handed effect start command includes information about the time when the left-handed effect sound is output.

When the image control board 140 receives the left-handed effect start command, it displays a left-handed effect image G41 on the upper left of the display unit 50a. The left-handed effect image G41 is erased.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment, in response to switching to a game state in which the appropriate shooting method of the game ball is different, the game ball according to the game state after the switching is shot. When the method, specifically, the left-handed effect that encourages "left-handed" is executed, the set value is set to a relatively high set value "5" or set value "6" as information on the set value. It may be implemented in a special manner suggesting that Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect of prompting the shooting method of the game ball, which generally does not attract much attention, and improve the game interest. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when switching from a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state that is advantageous to the player to a normal game state that is disadvantageous to the player, a left-handed performance is executed in a special mode. Then, it is suggested that the set value is set to a set value of "5" or "6", which is relatively high and advantageous to the player, so that the player's desire to play is reduced. can be mitigated. Furthermore, since the left-handed performance ends in a relatively short time after shifting to the normal game state, it is possible to make the left-handed performance less sticky and prevent the performance effect of the left-handed performance from being lowered.

Further, although detailed description was not given in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, in the jackpot game, as described in the basic embodiment, the right-handed image G2 is displayed. . That is, in the jackpot game, as an effect corresponding to the left-handed performance, an effect (right-handed performance) is performed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning opening 14 by performing a right-handed performance. Further, although detailed description is omitted, even in the high-probability high-base gaming state (probability variable production mode) and the low-probability high-base gaming state (time-saving production mode) in which it is appropriate for hitting to the right, the right-handed image G2 and The same image or an image different from the right-handed hitting image G2 but having the same or similar function is displayed, and an effect (right-handed effect) for prompting the game ball to be shot toward the second starting port 12 is performed. Then, the right hitting effect is executed in this way, but the set value suggesting effect is not executed in the right hitting effect. That is, for the right-handed effect, only a mode like the normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value) related to the left-handed effect in the fifth embodiment is provided. However, the right-handed effect can be executed by image and sound, and in the right-handed effect, the set value suggestion effect can be executed like the left-handed effect according to the fifth embodiment, but the left-handed effect is set. The value suggesting effect may not be executed.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The specific effect contents related to the set value suggesting effect are not limited to those in the fifth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the content of the voice related to the set value suggesting effect may be changed to a content other than "Return to left-handed hitting." In addition, regarding the number of times of sound related to the setting value suggestion effect, if the setting value is "5", it will be a number other than 5 such as 2 times, and if the setting value is "6", it will be a number other than 6 such as 3 times. can be

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the content of the sound related to the set value suggestion effect is the same when the set value is set to "5" and when the set value is set to "6". Although the number of times is different, the number of voices may be the same, but the contents of the voice may be different. In addition, both the content and the number of times of the sound relating to the set value suggesting effect may differ between when the set value is set to "5" and when the set value is set to "6".

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the effect mode of the left-handed effect is configured so that the normal mode and the special mode can be distinguished by the content of the sound and the type of the sound. One may be the same and the other may be different so that it can be distinguished. Furthermore, the contents of the voice and the type of voice are both the same, and the number of times the voice is played makes it possible to discriminate between the normal mode and the special mode, and further between the normal mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode. can be For example, regarding the content and type of the same left-handed effect sound, the number of times the sound is output is one in the case of the normal mode, the number of times the sound is output in the case of the first special mode, and the number of times the sound is output in the case of the second special mode. may be output three times.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is performed by the sound output from the speaker 52, but the effect device that performs the set value suggestion effect is not particularly limited and may be appropriately changed. For example, an image displayed on the image display device 50, an operation by the board movable body 55k, or light emission by the frame lamp 53 may be used to perform the set value suggesting effect. Alternatively, the set value suggestion effect may be executed depending on the display mode or display position of the left-handed effect image G41. For example, the colors of the normal mode, the colors of the first special mode, and the colors of the second special mode may be different from each other. Alternatively, the size of the normal mode, the size of the first special mode, and the size of the second special mode may be different from each other.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the left-handed effect is distinguished between the normal mode and the special mode depending on the effect content of the left-handed effect sound. may be distinguished. For example, when the left-handed effect of the normal mode is executed, only the left-handed effect image is displayed on the display unit 50a. , and a left-handed effect sound may be output from the speaker 52. - 特許庁Further, when the left-handed effect sound in the normal mode is executed, the left-handed effect sound is only output from the speaker 52, and the same left-handed effect sound is output from the speaker 52 in the left-handed effect sound in the special mode. The left-handed effect image may be output and displayed on the display section 50a.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as the information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value "5", which is a relatively high setting value, and the setting value "6" are set. However, this information is not limited to the fifth embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as the information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggesting effect, only one of the setting value "5", which is a relatively high setting value, and the setting value "6" is set. can be set to Further, in addition to or instead of setting the setting value "5", which is a relatively high setting value, and setting the setting value "6", all or part of the other setting values are The setting may also be the content suggested by the set value suggesting effect. Furthermore, rather than a specific set value, all or all of an odd set value, an even set value, a relatively high set value, and a relatively low set value Any one of them may be used as the information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect is executed using the left-handed effect to encourage left-handed hitting. The setting value suggesting effect may be executed by using the right-handed effect that prompts the player to play. In this case, as for the timing of the setting value suggesting effect, it may be executed during a specific period immediately after transitioning to the right-handed game state, or during a specific period during the right-handed game state. It may be executed during the last specific period of the game state related to right-handed hitting, or during the entire period of the game state related to right-handed hitting.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect is executed in a specific period immediately after shifting to the left-handed game state (normal game state), but the execution period of the set value suggesting effect is appropriately changed. You can In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the game state for right-handed hitting is shifted to the normal game state for left-handed hitting, and the set value suggesting effect is executed when the normal effect mode effect is started. From a game state related to right-handed hitting such as a jackpot game state or a high-base game state, basically shift to a high-probability low-base game state or low-probability low-base game state that basically hits left, and common according to the transition The latent mode may be configured to be settable, and the set value suggestion performance may be executed when the performance in the latent mode is started.

Also, even without changing the game state, for example, in the game state related to left-handed hitting (playing game state during passing), if a right-handed hit is made, the appropriate shooting method is left-handed, so the left-handed It is configured to execute a performance (left-handed attention calling performance) for calling attention to return to hitting, and in the left-handed attention calling performance, a set value suggesting performance is executed by setting the performance mode of the left-handed attention calling performance to a special mode. You can do it.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the sixth embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment can measure the time that has passed since the power was turned on. Executes an effect that suggests information about a value (set value suggesting effect). Although the details will be described later, the predetermined condition is a value obtained by dividing the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out in the pachinko machine PY6 by the total number of game balls fired and multiplying by 100 (hereinafter referred to as "measurement value") is determined to be equal to or greater than the determination value in the set value suggestion effect execution determination that determines whether or not the determination value is equal to or greater than the determination value set according to the set value.

Here, FIG. 71 shows a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side of the pachinko game machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment. As described in the basic embodiment, a sensor for detecting a winning game ball such as the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 such as the first starting hole sensor 11a and the second starting hole sensor 12a is provided. However, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to these sensors, as shown in FIG. It is

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, and the out opening 19 is one collected in a path (not shown). That is, the shot game ball finally passes through this path and is discharged out of the game area 6 . In addition, a game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, and the out opening 19 can flow down is called an "out course". called. A game ball passing through the out path is called an "out ball".

The out path is provided with an out sensor 19a for detecting a game ball. Therefore, the out sensor 19a detects all game balls that have been shot. Further, with the provision of the out sensor 19a, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process of step S104. For example, as shown in FIG. 72, after step S224 of the sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred as step S225, in other words, whether the out sensor 19a has detected a game ball determine whether or not If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that an out ball has not occurred (NO in S225), it ends the sensor detection process as it is, and if it determines that an out ball has occurred, it determines that an out ball has occurred in step S226. The indicated out designation command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the sensor detection processing is finished. The game ball set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the output process in step S107.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in step S221 in the big winning hole prize ball processing, issues a big winning hole prize ball payout designation command indicating that 14 prize balls are to be paid out according to the winning to the big winning hole 14. It is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

Also, FIG. 73 shows a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the effect control board 120 side of the pachinko game machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, an RTC (Real-Time Clock) 131 is mounted on the effect control board 120 . The RTC 131 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 131 operates on the power when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PY6 from a predetermined island power supply (not shown), and is provided on the power board 190 when power is not supplied from the island power supply. It operates by power supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown). Therefore, the RTC 131 can measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY6 is not powered on. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 131 may be provided in the effect control board 120 . A circuit including a capacitor or an internal battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

Furthermore, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is provided with an out ball counter 132 for counting the total number of out balls generated after the power is turned on, in other words, the total number of game balls shot after the power is turned on. there is In addition, the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is provided with a prize ball counter 133 for counting the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out by winning into the big prize winning port 14 after the power is turned on. .

Next, processing performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a part (second half) of the flowchart relating to the received command analysis process (S4201) in the sixth embodiment. After the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value designation command is not received in step S4320, or after finishing the set value setting process in step S4321, as step S4322, whether or not the out designation command is received. judge. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the out designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4324 as it is, and if it determines that the out designation command has been received, in step S4323, processing for counting the total number of out balls (out ball counting processing ), and then proceeds to step S4324. The effect control microcomputer 121 adds "1" to the counter value of the out ball counter 132 in the out ball counting process.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a command for specifying a special winning opening prize ball payout is received in step S4324. If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that it has not received the big winning opening prize ball payout designation command, it ends the reception command analysis processing as it is. After performing a process of counting the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out based on winnings to the winning hole 14 (large winning hole prize ball counting process), the received command analysis process is finished. The effect control microcomputer 121 sets the counter value of the prize ball counter 133 to the number corresponding to the number of game balls (prize balls) paid out by winning the prize to the big prize hole 14 in the big prize hole prize ball counting process. Add "14" to

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs processing (set value suggesting effect processing) related to the setting value suggesting effect after performing the light emitting data creating process of step S4203 in the 10ms timer interrupt process of step S4012. Here, a setting value suggestion effect that can be executed in the sixth embodiment will be described. The set value suggesting effect includes semi-certainty effect and certainty effect.

The quasi-confirmation effect is a effect that suggests that the set value is one of two set values. The semi-certainty effect includes a semi-certainty effect (first semi-certainty effect) that suggests that the set value is either 1 or 6, and a semi-certainty effect that suggests that the set value is either 2 or 5. There is an effect (second quasi-definite effect) and a semi-definite effect (third quasi-definite effect) suggesting that the set value is either 3 or 4. The first quasi-certainty effect can be executed when the set values are 1 and 6, the second quasi-certainty effect can be executed when the set values are 2 and 5, and the third quasi-certainty effect can be executed when the set value is 3. and 4.

On the other hand, the confirmation effect is a effect that suggests that the setting value is a certain setting value. The confirmation effect includes a confirmation effect that suggests that the set value is 6 (first confirmation effect), a confirmation effect that suggests that the set value is 5 (second confirmation effect), and a setting value of 4. There is a confirmation effect (third confirmation effect) that suggests something. The first confirmation performance is executable when the set value is 6, the second confirmation performance is executable when the set value is 5, and the third confirmation performance is executable when the set value is 4. .

Next, the setting value suggestion rendering process will be described. The production control microcomputer 121 first confirms the RTC 131 in the set value suggestion production, and determines whether the time elapsed since the power was turned on is a preset predetermined time, specifically, 5 hours or 10 hours. determine whether When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the time that has passed since the power is turned on is 5 hours or 10 hours, it determines whether the special figure fluctuation display or the jackpot game is being executed, that is, the game control microcomputer 101. determines whether or not any game is being executed. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation display or the jackpot game is being executed, it is based on the total number of out balls indicated by the out ball counter 132 and the winning to the big winning opening 14 indicated by the prize ball counter 133. The aforementioned measured value is calculated based on the total number of prize balls, and it is determined whether or not the measured value is equal to or greater than the determination value according to the currently set value.

The judgment value is set according to the setting value. Therefore, the determination value corresponding to the setting value (V6) corresponding to the setting value "6", the determination value (V5) corresponding to the setting value "5", and the determination value corresponding to the setting value "4" ( V4), a determination value (V3) corresponding to the setting value "3", a determination value (V2) corresponding to the setting value "2", and a determination value (V1) corresponding to the setting value "1". The determination value is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the determination value. That is, the determination values are set so as to satisfy determination value V6>determination value V5>determination value V4>determination value V3>determination value V2>determination value V1.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the measured value is equal to or greater than the determination value according to the currently set value, and if the elapsed time from turning on the power is 5 hours, the quasi-certainty performance is executed. If 10 hours have elapsed since the power was turned on, the set value "4", the set value "5", and the set value "6" are set. Confirmation performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to execute a confirmation performance on the condition that the player is in the game. This is because, as described above, the confirmation effect is an effect suggesting a set value of "4", a set value of "5", or a set value of "6".

The semi-certainty effect execution determination is executed with reference to a semi-certainty effect execution determination table. The semi-certainty effect execution determination table is associated with set values. FIG. 75(A) shows a configuration example of the semi-certainty effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 75(A), as a semi-certainty effect execution determination table, a semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6" and a semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5" A determination table, a semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "4", a semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "3", and a setting value "2" A semi-certainty effect execution determination table and a semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the set value "1" are provided. Each semi-certainty effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of the semi-certainty effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 75(A).

Incidentally, as described above, the semi-certainty effect performed when the set value "6" or the set value "1" is set is the first semi-certainty effect. Therefore, quasi-certainty effect execution determination based on the quasi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6", and quasi-certainty effect execution determination based on the quasi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "1" can be said to be a determination of whether or not to execute the first semi-certainty effect (first semi-certainty effect execution determination). Similarly, quasi-certainty effect execution determination based on the quasi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5", and quasi-certainty effect execution based on the quasi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "2" The determination can be said to be a determination of whether or not to execute the second semi-certainty effect (second semi-certainty effect execution determination). In addition, quasi-certainty effect execution determination based on the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "4", and semi-certainty effect execution determination based on the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "3" can be said to be a determination of whether or not to execute the third semi-certainty effect (third semi-certainty effect execution determination).

Here, according to the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6" and the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "1", the case of the setting value "6" is better , the selection rate for executing the semi-certainty effect (first semi-certainty effect) is high. Also, according to the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5" and the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "2", the case of the setting value "5" The selection rate for executing the semi-certainty effect (second semi-certainty effect) is high. Furthermore, according to the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "4" and the semi-certainty effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "3", the setting value "4" is more The selection rate for executing the semi-certainty effect (third semi-certainty effect) is high. That is, for the first semi-certainty effect, the second semi-certainty effect, and the third semi-certainty effect, the higher the set value associated with the semi-certainty effect, the easier the semi-certainty effect is executed. Therefore, when the first semi-certainty effect, the second semi-certainty effect, and the third semi-certainty effect are executed, the higher set value is set among the set values associated with the semi-certainty effect. can have expectations.

The performance control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value based on the set value flag stored in the performance RAM 124 when executing the semi-certainty performance, and determines the execution of the semi-certainty performance associated with the confirmed set value. Semi-certainty effect execution determination (first semi-certainty effect execution determination, second semi-certainty effect execution determination, third semi-certainty effect execution determination) is performed based on the table.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that "the quasi-certainty production (first quasi-certainty production) is to be executed" in the first quasi-certainty production execution judgment, the first quasi-certainty production showing the production contents of the first quasi-certainty production is started. A command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. Similarly, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that "the semi-certainty production (second semi-certainty production) is to be executed" in the second quasi-certainty production execution determination, a second quasi-certainty production representing the production content of the second quasi-certainty production is executed. When the proof effect start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and it is determined in the third quasi-certainty effect execution determination that "the quasi-certainty effect (third quasi-certainty effect) is to be executed", the effect contents of the third quasi-certainty effect. is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

The first quasi-certainty effect start command, the second quasi-certainty effect start command, and the third quasi-certainty effect start command set in the output buffer are output to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S4004. When the image control board 140 receives the first quasi-certainty effect start command, the image control board 140 performs the first quasi-certainty effect of the effect indicated by the first quasi-certainty effect start command on the display unit 50a. Similarly, when receiving the second quasi-certainty effect start command, the image control board 140 performs the second quasi-certainty effect of the effect content indicated by the second quasi-certainty effect start command on the display unit 50a, and starts the third quasi-certainty effect. When the command is received, the third quasi-certainty effect of the content of the effect indicated by the third quasi-certainty effect start command is performed on the display section 50a. Specific effects of the first quasi-certainty effect, the second quasi-certainty effect, and the third quasi-certainty effect will be described later.

Further, the confirmation effect execution determination is executed with reference to a confirmation effect execution determination table. FIG. 75(B) shows a configuration example of the confirmation effect execution determination table. The confirmation effect execution determination table is associated with set values. As shown in FIG. 75(B), as the confirmation effect execution determination table, the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6" and the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5". , and a confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "4" are provided. Each confirmation effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of the semi-certainty effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 75(B).

In addition, as described above, the confirmation effect performed when the set value "6" is set is the first confirmation effect. Therefore, the confirmation effect execution determination based on the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "6" can be said to be the determination of whether or not to execute the first confirmation effect (first confirmation effect execution determination). Similarly, the confirmation effect execution determination based on the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "5" can be said to be the determination of whether or not to execute the second confirmation effect (second confirmation effect execution determination). . Also, the confirmation effect execution determination based on the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "4" can be said to be the determination of whether or not to execute the third confirmation effect (third confirmation effect execution determination).

Here, the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6", the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5", and the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "4" According to the table, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect is high in the order of setting value "6">setting value "5">setting value "4". That is, the higher the set value, the easier the confirmation effect is executed.

The performance control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value based on the set value flag stored in the performance RAM 124 when executing the confirmation performance, and the confirmation performance execution determination table associated with the confirmed setting value. Based on this, the confirmation effect execution determination (first confirmation effect execution determination, second confirmation effect execution determination, third confirmation effect execution determination) is performed.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that "the confirmation production (first confirmation production) is to be executed" in the first confirmation production execution determination, the production RAM 124 stores a first confirmation production start command representing the production content of the first confirmation production. output buffer. Similarly, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that "the confirmation production (second confirmation production) is to be executed" in the second confirmation production execution determination, it issues a second confirmation production start command representing the production contents of the second confirmation production. When it is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 and it is determined in the third confirmation performance execution determination that "the confirmation performance (third assurance performance) is to be executed", a third confirmation performance start command representing the performance contents of the third assurance performance is issued. It is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

The first confirmation effect start command, the second confirmation effect start command, and the third confirmation effect start command set in the output buffer are output to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S4004. When the image control board 140 receives the first confirmation effect start command, the image control board 140 performs the first confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the first confirmation effect start command on the display section 50a. Similarly, when the image control board 140 receives the second confirmation effect start command, the second confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the second confirmation effect start command is performed on the display unit 50a, and when the third confirmation effect start command is received. , the third confirmation effect of the content of the effect indicated by the third confirmation effect start command is performed on the display section 50a. Specific effects of the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect will be described later.

Next, a specific example of the quasi-certainty effect will be described. The quasi-confirmation effect is performed by displaying an image on the display section 50a. Hereinafter, an image that constitutes the quasi-certainty effect will be referred to as a “quasi-certainty effect image”. The semi-certainty effect image differs depending on the effect type of the semi-certainty effect. That is, the semi-certainty effect image forming the first semi-certain effect, the semi-certain effect image forming the second semi-certain effect, and the semi-certain effect image forming the third semi-certain effect are different from each other. Hereinafter, the quasi-certainty effect image that constitutes the first quasi-certainty effect will be referred to as the "first quasi-certainty effect image", and the quasi-certainty effect image that configures the second quasi-certainty effect will be referred to as the "second quasi-certainty effect. A semi-certainty effect image forming the third semi-certainty effect is called a "third semi-certainty effect image".

The first quasi-certain effect image, the second quasi-certain effect image, and the third quasi-certain effect image are commonly composed of predetermined characters wearing uniforms, but the uniform numbers attached to the uniforms are different. . The uniform number associated with the first semi-certain effect image is "16", the uniform number associated with the second semi-certain effect image is "25", and the uniform number associated with the third semi-certain effect image is "34". . Since the first quasi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value "1" or the set value "6" is set, it includes a uniform number representing "16" composed of "1" and "6" By displaying the second semi-confirmation effect image, it is suggested that the setting value "1" or the setting value "6" is set. Similarly, since the second quasi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value “2” or the set value “5” is set, the background representing “25” composed of “2” and “5” is set. By displaying the second quasi-confirmation effect image including the number, it is suggested that the setting value "2" or the setting value "5" is set. In addition, since the third quasi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value "3" or the set value "4" is set, the jersey number representing "34" composed of "3" and "4" By displaying the second semi-confirmation effect image including , it is suggested that the setting value "3" or the setting value "4" is set.

Here, FIG. 76 shows a specific example of the semi-confirmation effect image displayed on the display section 50a. FIG. 76(A) is a diagram showing a specific example of a first quasi-proof effect image, FIG. 76(B) is a diagram showing a specific example of a second quasi-proof effect image, and FIG. 76(C) is a diagram showing a third FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example of a semi-confirmation effect image; As described above, when the first semi-certainty effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image control board 140 generates the first semi-certainty effect image G71 shown in FIG. 76(A) as the first semi-certainty effect. , superimposed on another image on the display unit 50a. Further, as described above, when the second semi-certainty effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image control board 140 generates the second semi-certainty effect image shown in FIG. 76(B) as the second semi-certainty effect. G72 is superimposed on another image on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, as described above, when the third quasi-certainty effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image control board 140 generates the third quasi-certainty effect image shown in FIG. G73 is superimposed on another image on the display unit 50a.

Note that the duration of the first semi-certainty effect, the second semi-certainty effect, and the third semi-certainty effect, that is, the first semi-certainty effect image G71, the second semi-certainty effect image G72, and the third semi-certainty effect image G73. are displayed on the display unit 50a at the same time. The performance times of the first quasi-certainty effect, the second quasi-certainty effect, and the third quasi-certainty effect are not particularly limited and can be set appropriately, but are set to 3 seconds in the sixth embodiment.

Next, a specific example of the confirmation effect will be described. The confirmation effect is performed by displaying an image on the display section 50a. Hereinafter, an image that constitutes the confirmation effect will be referred to as a “confirmation effect image”. The confirmation effect image differs depending on the effect type of the confirmation effect. In other words, the confirmation effect image that constitutes the first confirmation effect, the confirmation effect image that constitutes the second confirmation effect, and the confirmation effect image that constitutes the third semi-certain effect are different from each other. Hereinafter, the confirmation effect image that constitutes the first confirmation effect is referred to as "first confirmation effect image", the confirmation effect image that constitutes the second confirmation effect is referred to as "second confirmation effect image", and the second confirmation effect image is referred to as "second confirmation effect image". The confirmation effect image that constitutes the 3 confirmation effects is referred to as a "third confirmation effect image".

Each of the first confirmation effect image, the second confirmation effect image, and the third confirmation effect image is composed of a different character. The first confirmation effect image is composed of the character A, the second confirmation effect image is composed of the character B, and the third confirmation effect image is composed of the character C. Further, each confirmation effect is composed of an animation using each confirmation effect image. Specifically, in each confirmation effect, a confirmation effect image made up of characters runs around the periphery of the display section 50a.

Here, FIGS. 77 to 79 show specific examples of the confirmation effect performed on the display section 50a. FIG. 77 shows a specific example of the first confirmation effect, FIG. 78 shows a specific example of the second confirmation effect, and FIG. 79 shows a specific example of the third confirmation effect.

As described above, the image control board 140 starts the first confirmation effect immediately upon receiving the first confirmation effect start command. In the first confirmation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 77A, a first confirmation effect image G74 representing character A is displayed at the center of the lower end portion of the display section 50a. Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(B) to 77(C), it runs clockwise along the periphery of the display section 50a. Finally, as shown in FIG. 77(D), the first confirmation effect image G74 returns to the center of the lower end of the display section 50a where it started running, and stops there, as shown in FIG. 77(E). disappears like In this way, the first confirmation effect is configured from the appearance of the first confirmation effect image G74 until it disappears after running along the periphery of the display section 50a.

Further, as described above, the image control board 140 starts the second confirmation effect immediately upon receiving the second confirmation effect start command. In the second confirmation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 78A, a second confirmation effect image G75 representing character B is displayed at the center of the lower end of the display section 50a. Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(B) to 78(C), the second confirmation effect image G75 runs clockwise along the periphery of the display section 50a. Finally, as shown in FIG. 78(D), the second confirmation effect image G75 returns to the center of the lower end of the display section 50a where it started running, and stops there, as shown in FIG. 78(E). disappears like In this way, the second confirmation effect is configured from the appearance of the second confirmation effect image G75 until it disappears after running along the periphery of the display section 50a.

Furthermore, as described above, the image control board 140 starts the third confirmation effect immediately upon receiving the third confirmation effect start command. In the third confirmation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 79A, a third confirmation effect image G76 representing the character C is displayed in the center of the lower end portion of the display section 50a. Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(B) to 79(C), the third confirmation effect image G76 runs clockwise along the periphery of the display section 50a. Finally, as shown in FIG. 79(D), the third confirmation effect image G76 returns to the center of the lower end of the display section 50a where it started running, and stops there, as shown in FIG. 79(E). disappears like In this way, the third confirmation effect is configured from the appearance of the third confirmation effect image G76 until it disappears after running along the periphery of the display section 50a.

Note that the rendering times of the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect, that is, the first confirmation effect image G74, the second confirmation effect image G75, and the third confirmation effect image G76 are displayed on the display section 50a. are set to be the same. The performance times of the first definite effect, the second definite effect, and the third definite effect are not particularly limited and can be set appropriately, but in the sixth embodiment, they are set to 10 seconds. Furthermore, the operation contents (how to run) of the first confirmation effect image G74, the second confirmation effect image G75, and the third confirmation effect image G76 relating to the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect are also substantially the same. is set to

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment, the measurement value calculated based on the total number of out balls and the total number of prize balls based on the winning to the big winning hole 14 is currently set. Confirmation production is executed on the condition that it is equal to or more than the judgment value according to the set value. That is, the confirmation effect is executed according to the performance in the pachinko gaming machine PY6 on that day. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the reliability of the confirmation effect suggesting the set value. In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY6, the measured value includes the condition that it is equal to or greater than the determination value according to the currently set value, but basically the time elapsed after turning on the power When the predetermined time comes, an opportunity to execute the semi-certainty effect or the certainty effect comes. Therefore, as compared with the case of determining whether or not to execute the semi-certainty effect or the certainty effect by a predetermined judgment, it is possible to reliably provide an opportunity for execution, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. Further, the semi-certainty effect or the certainty effect is executed on the condition that the game by the game control microcomputer 101 such as the special figure variable display or the jackpot game is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate.

(Modified example of the sixth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The specific effects of the semi-certainty effect and the certainty effect are not limited to those of the sixth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the contents of the semi-confirmation effect image may be other than characters wearing uniforms with jersey numbers. Also, the content of the confirmation effect image may be other than the clockwise running of the character on the periphery of the display section 50a.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the first quasi-certainty production, the second quasi-certainty production, and the third quasi-certainty production have the same character and are distinguished by being configured with different uniform numbers. The images may be distinguished by differentiating the object, rendering time, size of the image, or color of the image. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect are substantially the same in character movement, but are distinguished by being configured so that the character types are different. Although the characters are of the same type, they may be differentiated by configuring them so that the character's actions, rendering time, image size, or image color are different.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the quasi-certainty effect and the certainty effect are executed by displaying an image on the display unit 50a. You can change it. For example, the set value suggesting effect may be performed using other effect devices such as voice output from the speaker 52, operation by the board movable body 55k, or light emission by the frame lamp 53.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as the information about the setting value suggested by the confirmation effect, the setting value "4", which is a relatively high setting value, is set, the setting value "5" is set, and the set value "6" is set, but this information is not limited to the sixth embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as the information about the set value suggested by the confirmation effect, the set value “4”, which is a relatively high set value, is set, the set value “5” is set, and the set value “6” is set. may be set to any one or a part of the set. In addition to or instead of setting the setting value "4", setting the setting value "5", and setting the setting value "6", other setting values All or part of is set may also be the content suggested by the confirmation effect.

In addition, as information about the setting value suggested by the semi-certainty effect, the setting value “1” or “6” is set, the setting value “2” or “5” is set, and the setting value “ 3" or "4" is set, but this information is not limited to the sixth embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as information about the setting value suggested by the semi-confirmation production, the setting value "1" or "6" is set, the setting value "2" or "5" is set, and the setting value " 3" or 4" may be set to any one or a part thereof. Further, the information regarding the set value that the semi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value is an odd number and that the set value is an even number may be used.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the semi-certainty effect and the certainty effect can be executed on the condition that the measured value is equal to or greater than the judgment value according to the set value. One of the effects may be configured to be executable even if the condition is not satisfied. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, semi-certainty effect and certainty effect can be executed on the condition that the game by the game control microcomputer 101 is executed. , may be configured to be executable even if the conditions are not met. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, on the condition that the quasi-certainty effect execution determination determines that the quasi-certainty effect is executed, and that the quasi-certainty effect execution determination determines that the definite effect is executed, the quasi-certainty effect and the confirmation effect can be executed, however, any one of the effects or any one of the effects may be executed even if the condition is not satisfied. That is, when the time that has passed since the power is turned on reaches a predetermined time, if the measured value is equal to or greater than the judgment value according to the set value, either one or both of the semi-confirmation production and the confirmation production will be performed. It may be executed.

Further, the selection rate for executing the semi-certainty effect in the semi-certainty effect execution determination is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Further, the relationship according to the set value of the selection rate for executing the semi-certainty effect in the semi-certainty effect execution determination for each semi-certainty effect is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case of the set value "6" and in the case of the set value "1", the selection rate for executing the semi-certainty effect may be made the same. Alternatively, the selection rate for executing the semi-certainty effect may be higher when the setting value is "1" than when the setting value is "6". The same applies to the second semi-certainty effect and the third semi-certainty effect.

Furthermore, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect in the confirmation effect execution determination is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, regarding the confirmation effect, the relationship according to the set value of the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect in the confirmation effect execution determination is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect may be the same for the setting value "6", the setting value "5", and the setting value "4". Alternatively, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect may be increased in the order of setting value "6"<setting value "5"<setting value "4".

Also, the semi-certainty effect and the certainty effect can be executed when the time that has elapsed since the power is turned on reaches a predetermined time, but the specific content of the predetermined time may be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, there are two types of time that has elapsed since power-on during which the semi-certainty effect and the certainty effect can be executed, but one type or three or more types may be used. In the case of one type, either one of the semi-certainty effect and the certainty effect may be executed. Also, in the case of three or more types, an effect suggesting information on different setting values may be executed. Also, instead of the time that has passed since the power was turned on, the time that has passed since the start of the game or the time may be set as the time at which the semi-certainty effect and the surety effect can be executed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described mainly based on the basic embodiment and the first embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the seventh embodiment, the basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be described. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, etc., or the configurations that correspond in the same way.

In the seventh embodiment, the specific game state (game state setting table) set with the end of the jackpot game is different from the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, the game state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern A, the jackpot pattern B, the jackpot pattern D, and the jackpot pattern E is a high probability high base game state, and this game state. The end condition of the high probability state and the time saving state according to is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "100 times". On the other hand, the game state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern C and the jackpot pattern F is a low-probability high-base game state, and the end condition of the time-saving state related to this game state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "100 times”.

In addition, as the production mode set with the end of the jackpot game, the high probability high base game state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern A, the jackpot pattern B, the jackpot pattern D, and the jackpot pattern E is the probability variable production mode. In the low-probability high base game state after the big-hit game related to the big-hit pattern C and the big-hit pattern F, the time-saving performance mode is set.

And, in the seventh embodiment, as will be described later, the high probability high base game state (probability variable production mode) or the low probability high base game state (shorter working hours production mode) ends and the normal game state (normal production mode) In response to the switching, an advantageous game state end effect is executed. In the advantageous game state end effect, after the so-called "first hit" is made, in other words, after the stop display of the jackpot pattern is performed in the special figure fluctuation display in the normal game state (after the jackpot determination is determined as a jackpot) again The number of prize balls won by the player in the jackpot game until returning to the normal game state (normal production mode) (hereinafter referred to as "total number of wins") is reported. Furthermore, when the advantageous game state end effect is executed, a set value effect suggesting predetermined information regarding the set value is executed. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, the advantageous game state end effect and the set value effect are executed in the display section 50a. Also, the advantageous game state end effect may be simply referred to as "end effect".

There are a first effect method and a second effect method as the effect method of the set value effect. The first effect mode is a set value effect mode that suggests whether the set value is relatively high or low. Specifically, when any one of the set value "1" to the set value "3" is set, the set value effect of the effect mode (first normal mode) corresponding to it is executed, and the set value " 4” to set value “6” are set, the set value effect of the corresponding effect mode (second normal mode) is executed. On the other hand, the second rendering method is a rendering method of setting value rendering suggesting the set value itself. Specifically, the set value effect is executed in the effect mode set for each set value. Therefore, when the set value effect of the second effect method is executed than when the set value effect of the first effect method is executed, more accurate information regarding the set value is provided to the player. will be provided. In addition, when the set value effect of the second effect method is executed, the set value is easier for the player to understand than when the set value effect of the first effect method is executed.

Note that, hereinafter, the rendering mode associated with the first rendering method is collectively referred to as the “normal mode”, and the first The rendering mode of the rendering method is referred to as the "first normal mode", and the rendering mode of the first rendering method that suggests that any of the set values "4" to "6" is set is referred to as the "second normal mode". "Mode". On the other hand, the rendering mode associated with the second rendering method is collectively referred to as the "specific mode", and the rendering mode of the second rendering method that suggests that the set value "1" is set is the "first specific mode". , and the effect mode of the second effect mode suggesting that the set value "2" is set is called a "second specific mode", and the second effect mode suggesting that the set value "3" is set. The rendering mode of the rendering method is referred to as a "third specific mode", and the rendering mode of the second rendering method that suggests that the set value "4" is set is referred to as a "fourth specific mode", and the set value "5". will be referred to as a "fifth specific mode", and the second effect mode indicating that the set value "6" will be set will be referred to as " 6th specific embodiment".

In addition, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is established in which presentation method the set value presentation is executed. In the seventh embodiment, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, only the set value effect of the first effect method is executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second effect is performed in addition to the set value effect of the first effect method. A method setpoint rendering is also performed. In the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the pachinko game machine PY7 is equipped with a cross-shaped button device 42, and the predetermined condition related to the effect method of this set value effect is that the advantageous game state end effect is executed. It is set that any one of the predetermined operating portions 42ku, 42kd, 42kr, and 42kl of the cross button 42k is operated when the button is on.

``One of the operation parts 42ku, 42kd, 42kr, and 42kl of the cross button 42k'' that constitutes the predetermined condition is commonly known as ``first hit'', specifically, the stop of the jackpot pattern in the special figure fluctuation display in the normal game state. It is determined by the cross button operation section determination executed at the start of the jackpot game executed in response to the display (jackpot determination in the normal game state determined to be a jackpot). The determination of the cross button operation section is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 .

The effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the cross button operation part determination table and executes the cross button operation part determination. FIG. 81A is a configuration example of a cross-button operation section determination table. As shown in FIG. 81(A), the cross-button operation unit determination table is set so that the selection ratios for the operation units 42ku, 42kd, 42kr, and 42kl of each cross-button 42k are the predetermined selection ratios shown in FIG. 81(A). is set appropriately. As shown in FIG. 81(A), the selectivity of the cross button 42k to the operating portions 42ku, 42kd, 42kr, and 42kl is equally set regardless of the big hit determination result and the set value.

The effect control microcomputer 121, when the stop display of the jackpot pattern is performed in the special figure fluctuation display in the normal game state (when it is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination in the normal game state), at the start of the jackpot game, for example, In the opening effect start process of step S4315, the cross button operation part determination is performed using the cross button operation part determination table. The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a flag indicating the determination result in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 when the cross button operation part determination is performed.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 executes a suggestion production that suggests a predetermined condition for executing the set value production of the second production method as a result of the determination of the cross button operation unit in the probability variable production mode or the time reduction production mode. I have something to do. The suggestive effect is executed as a foretelling effect suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win (a game state advantageous to the player). In the seventh embodiment, the notice effect is executed in the special figure variation effect. The performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice performance at the start of the special figure fluctuation performance. Whether or not to execute the notice effect is determined by the notice effect execution determination.

When the special figure fluctuation start command is received, the production control microcomputer 121 executes the notice production execution determination after determining the special figure fluctuation production pattern in the special figure fluctuation production start time process of step S4306. The notice effect execution determination is executed with reference to a notice effect execution determination table. The notice effect execution determination table is provided in association with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. Here, FIG. 81(B) shows a configuration example of the advance notice effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 81(B), as the notice effect execution determination table, the notice effect execution determination table for the battle jackpot variation, the notice effect execution determination table for the battle losing change, and the notice effect execution for the reach loss change change. A determination table, a notice performance execution determination table for shortened A loss variation, and a notice performance execution determination table for shortened B loss variation are provided.

Each of the notice effect execution determination tables is appropriately set so that the selection rate of "execute" and "not execute" for the notice effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 81(B). As shown in FIG. 81(B), there are cases where "perform" is determined for both the big winning variation and the losing variation. Therefore, when the advance notice effect is executed, there is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation display will result in a big hit.

Further, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the effect is to be "executed" in the effect execution determination, it further determines the effect type (previous effect type) of the effect. In the seventh embodiment, the advance notice effect is configured by displaying an image showing a state in which a predetermined character emits a balloon surrounding a predetermined line on the display section 50a. The content of the dialogue included in the balloon is associated with the announcement effect type.

In the seventh embodiment, a first effect type to a fourth effect type are provided as the advance notice effect types. As for the effect content of each of the advance effect types, the first effect type is associated with the line "hot heat", the second effect type is associated with the line "chance!" ', and the fourth effect type is 'Press '0' on the end screen! ” is associated with the line. The result of the determination of the cross-button operation unit is entered in the "o" portion of the line "Press "o"" in the fourth effect type. If the judgment result of the cross-shaped button operation unit is ``If the upper operation part is 42ku, the character ``Up'' will be entered in the ``○'' part, and if ``If the lower operation part 42kd, the character ``Down'' will be ``If it is the left operation unit 42kl, the character ``left'' will be entered in the portion ``.largecircle. In this way, the advance notice effect of the fourth effect type constitutes a suggestive effect suggesting the result of the ten-button operation unit determination.

The notice effect type is determined by the notice effect type determination. The notice effect type determination is executed with reference to a notice effect type determination table. The notice effect type determination table is provided in association with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. Here, FIG. 81(C) shows a configuration example of the advance notice effect type determination table. As shown in FIG. 81 (C), as the notice effect type determination table, the notice effect type determination table for battle jackpot variation, the notice effect type determination table for battle loss change, and the notice effect type determination table for reach loss change A determination table and a notice performance type determination table for shortening A loss variation are provided.

Each notice effect type determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for each notice effect type becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 81(C). After executing the notice performance type determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a notice performance start command indicating execution of the notice performance in the performance class determined by the notice performance class determination in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.例文帳に追加. The advance notice effect start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). Upon receiving the notice effect start command, the image control board 140 appropriately executes the notice effect in the effect type indicated by the command on the display unit 50a immediately after the special figure variation effect is started. In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that it is the "fourth performance type" in the announcement performance type determination, it confirms the flag indicating the result of the cross button operation unit determination set in the performance RAM 124, and the result A notice effect start command including contents is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Next, specific examples of the suggestion effect, the advantageous game state end effect, and the set value effect will be described. It should be noted that here, a specific example in which the suggestive effect, the advantageous game state end effect, and the set value effect are executed in the high-probability high-base game state (probability variable effect mode) will be described. In addition, the display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, the display of the pending icon, the relevant icon, etc. is omitted.

FIG. 82(A) is a diagram showing how an opening effect is performed on the display section 50a. When the stop display of the jackpot symbols is performed in the normal game state and the opening effect as shown in FIG.

FIG. 82(B) is a diagram showing how the ending effect is performed on the display section 50a. As shown in FIG. 82(B), in the ending effect, after the jackpot game, it is suggested that the probability variable effect mode is entered, in other words, the high probability high base game state is entered.

FIG. 82(C) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the ending effect is finished on the display section 50a and the effect in the variable probability effect mode is started. As shown in FIG. 82(C), the effect control microcomputer 121, when the variable probability effect mode is set, in the display unit 50a, the high probability high base game state, in other words, until the variable probability effect mode ends An image G60 (remaining number of times image G60) that suggests the number of executions of executable special figure variation display (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation remaining number of times") is displayed.

When the image control board 141 receives the special figure variation effect start command, the probability variation remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image G60 at the start of the special figure variation effect is reduced by "1". Therefore, as described above, the end condition of the high probability high base gaming state is that the special figure fluctuation display is executed 100 times, and the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display that can be repeatedly executed in the high probability high base gaming state is Since it is 100 times, immediately after the ending production ends, before the first special figure fluctuation production by the probability variation production mode is started, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of times is "100".

Then, when the first special figure fluctuation effect by the probability variation effect mode is started, as shown in FIG. ” times. After that, in the probability variation production mode, when the special figure variation display is executed 49 times without a big hit, the probability variation remaining number is "50" times, so as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the remaining number image G60 , suggesting that the probability variable remaining number of times is "50".

Further, FIG. 82(E) is a diagram showing a state in which the advance notice effect of the second effect type is being executed on the display section 50a. As described above, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the notice effect execution determination at the start of the special figure fluctuation effect, and when it determines that the notice effect is "executed" in the determination, further performs the notice effect type determination. Then, for example, at the start of the 50th special figure variation display in the high-probability high-base game state, it is determined that the notice effect is "executed" in the notice effect execution determination, and "the second effect type" is determined in the notice effect type determination. Then, immediately after the start of the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. 82(E), the advance notice production of the second production type is executed.

In the notice effect, an image G61 (preview effect image G61) corresponding to the notice effect is displayed on the display section 50a. Note that FIG. 82(E) shows a specific example of the forewarning effect of the second effect type, so the dialogue portion in the forewarning effect image G61 is composed of "Chance!". Therefore, if the effect type related to the advance notice effect is the first effect type, the line "chance!" If there is, the line "chance!"

Further, it is assumed that the game further progresses in the high-probability high-base game state (probability variable production mode) from the situation shown in FIG. 82(E). Figure 83 (A) shows that the 70th special figure fluctuation display is started without a big hit in the probability variation production mode, and the notice production of the fourth production type is executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation production. It is a diagram. The special figure variation display is executed 70 times in the high probability high base gaming state (probability variation production mode), and the probability variation remaining number is "30" times, so as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the remaining number image G60, It suggests that the probability variation remaining number of times is "30". Furthermore, since the advance notice effect of the fourth effect type is being executed, the notice effect image G61 suggests the result of the cross button operation unit determination.

In the specific example of FIG. 83(A), the notice effect image G61 is displayed as "Press 'Right' on the end screen! ' is included, the result of the determination of the cross button operation unit is 'right operation unit 42kr'. It should be noted that if the result of the judgment of the cross button operation unit is "Up operation unit 42ku", the line "Press "Right" on the end screen!" ” replaces the “right” part with “upper”. Similarly, if the result of cross-button operation unit determination is "lower operation unit 42kd", the line "Press 'right' on the end screen! "Right" part is replaced with "Bottom". Also, if the result of the judgment of the cross button operation part is "left operation part 42kl", the line "Press 'right' on the end screen! ” replaces the “right” part with “left”.

Furthermore, in the probability variation production mode, the special figure fluctuation display continues to be repeatedly executed without hitting the jackpot, and the 100th special figure fluctuation display is started, and the result of the jackpot determination related to the special figure fluctuation display is "losing". Suppose The special figure variation display is executed 100 times in the high probability high base game state (probability variation production mode), and the probability variation remaining number is "0" times, so the remaining number of times image G60 has the probability variation remaining number of "0" times. suggests that And, in this case, when a predetermined time (for example, 7.0 seconds) has passed since the special figure fluctuation effect was started, the entire display section 50a is blacked out as shown in FIG. 83(C).

As shown in FIG. 83(C), when the display unit 50a blacks out, an advantageous game state end effect and a set value effect of the first effect method are subsequently executed in a manner superimposed on the blackout. In the advantageous game state end effect, the total winning number is reported. Specifically, in the advantageous game state end effect, an advantageous game state end effect image G62 associated with the advantageous game state end effect is displayed, and the total winning number is displayed in the advantageous game state end effect image G62. Thus, the advantageous game state end effect using the advantageous game state end effect image G62 is executed, but when the advantageous game state end effect is executed, the set value effect of the first effect type is also executed at the same time. That is, the advantageous game state end effect image G62 includes a first advantageous game state end effect image G61a displayed when any one of the set values "1" to "3" is set, and the set value "4". There is a second advantageous game state end effect image G62b that is displayed when any one of to "6" is set. Therefore, when the advantageous game state end effect in which the first advantageous game state end effect image G61a is displayed is executed, a second image indicating that one of the set values "1" to "3" is set is simultaneously executed. It means that the set value effect of the 1 effect method is being executed. On the other hand, when the advantageous game state end effect in which the second advantageous game state end effect image G62b is displayed is executed, a second image indicating that one of the set values "4" to "6" is set is simultaneously executed. This means that the set value effect of the 2 effect method is being executed.

The display content of the first advantageous gaming state end effect image G62a and the display content of the second advantageous gaming state end effect image G62b are different, and the display of the first advantageous gaming state end effect image G62a is the set value of the first normal mode. The display of the second advantageous gaming state end effect image G62b also constitutes the set value effect of the second normal mode.

The display content of the first advantageous game state end effect image G62a and the display content of the second advantageous game state end effect image G62b both display the total number of wins, and the first advantageous game state end effect image G62a and the second advantageous game state end effect image G62a It is different from the advantageous game state end effect image G62b, and can be set as appropriate within a distinguishable range. In the seventh embodiment, it is set as shown in FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B).

FIG. 84(A) is a diagram showing how the first advantageous gaming state end effect image G62a is displayed (the set value effect of the first normal mode according to the first effect method is being executed), and FIG. (B) is a diagram showing how the second advantageous gaming state end effect image G62b is displayed (the set value effect of the second normal mode relating to the first effect method is being executed). As shown in FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B), in the first advantageous gaming state end effect image G62a and the second advantageous gaming state end effect image G62b, the letters and numbers representing the total number of wins are They are the same, but differ in the overall shape that defines the advantageous game state end effect image G62.

The advantageous game state end effect (set value effect of the first effect method) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 5.0 seconds). When any one of the parts 42ku, 42kd, 42kl and 42kr is operated, the set value effect of the second effect method is superimposed on the advantageous game state end effect (set value effect of the first effect method). Specifically, when the setting value "1" is set, an image G63a suggesting the setting value "1" (first setting value suggesting image G63a) is displayed, and the setting value "2" is set. If there is, an image G63b suggesting the setting value "2" (second setting value suggesting image G63b) is displayed, and if the setting value "3" is set, an image G63c suggesting the setting value "3" is displayed. (Third set value suggestion image G63c) is displayed. On the other hand, when the set value "4" is set, an image G63d suggesting the set value "4" (fourth set value suggesting image G63d) is displayed, and when the set value "5" is set, , an image G63e suggesting a setting value of "5" (fifth setting value suggesting image G63e) is displayed, and if a setting value of "6" is set, an image G63f suggesting a setting value of "6" (fifth setting value suggesting image G63e) is displayed. A set value suggestion image G63f) is displayed. In the following, the first setting value suggesting image G63a to the sixth setting value suggesting image G63f may be collectively referred to as "setting value suggesting image G63".

The display contents of the first setting value suggesting image G63a to the sixth setting value suggesting image G63f are different from each other in terms of the display contents of the first setting value suggesting image G63a to the sixth setting value suggesting image G63f. It can be appropriately set within the range of one-to-one correspondence with the image G63.

As shown in FIGS. 85A to 85F, the first setting value suggesting image G63a is composed of one character, the second setting value suggesting image G63b is composed of two characters, and the third setting value suggesting image G63b is composed of two characters. The setting value suggesting image G63c is made up of three characters, the fourth setting value suggesting image G63d is made up of four characters, the fifth setting value suggesting image G63e is made up of five characters, and the sixth setting value suggesting image G63e is made up of five characters. The suggestive image G63f is composed of six characters. That is, the number of characters displayed as each setting value suggestion image G63 corresponds to the setting value.

Further, as described above, when any one of the set values "1" to "3" is set, the advantageous game state end effect in which the first advantageous game state end effect image G62a is displayed is executed. A first setting value suggesting image G63a, a second setting value suggesting image G63b, and a third setting value suggesting image G63c are displayed superimposed on the first advantageous gaming state end effect image G62a. On the other hand, when any one of the set values "4" to "6" is set, the advantageous game state end effect in which the second advantageous game state end effect image G62b is displayed is executed, so the second advantageous game. A fourth setting value suggesting image G63d, a fifth setting value suggesting image G63e, and a sixth setting value suggesting image G63f are displayed superimposed on the state end effect image G62b.

Then, in accordance with the end of the advantageous game state end effect, the blackout is canceled and the advantageous game state end effect image G62 and the set value suggesting image G63 are erased, and subsequently shown in FIG. 86(A). Effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure. Further, since the high-probability high-base game state is changed to the normal game state, the performance mode is switched from the variable-probability performance mode to the normal performance mode, and the first normal background image G111 is displayed as the background image on the display section 50a. And when the special figure fluctuation display is started, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the special figure fluctuation production by the normal production mode is started.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the special figure 2 variation pattern related to the last special figure 2 variation display in the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state including the time saving state is a loss variation, surely In order to execute the advantageous game state end effect, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured differently from the basic embodiment. Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the seventh embodiment will be described.

High probability high base game state and low probability high base game state, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display in the time saving state is 1 to 99 times and 100 times It is divided into . Here, the former is configured in the same manner as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the basic embodiment. On the other hand, the latter is configured differently from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the basic embodiment.

FIG. 87 is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for the 100th (last) special figure 2 variation display in the time saving state is a special figure variation pattern with a special figure variation time of 15 seconds in the case of loss. It is configured so that only Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the advantageous game state ending effect as described above.

In addition, the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern related to the 100th (last) special figure 2 fluctuation display in the time saving state is a jackpot fluctuation can be set appropriately, for example, in this case Always make sure that the special figure fluctuation time is a special figure fluctuation pattern of 15 seconds, and after the above-mentioned blackout (see FIG. 83 (C)) is performed, shown in FIG. 29 (B) and FIG. 30 (C) After such a movable body effect is executed, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a big win can be performed.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY7, in order to display the total number of wins, the game control microcomputer 101, as in the sixth embodiment, controls the winning of the big winning hole 14 in the big winning hole winning ball process of step S224. In response, a large winning opening prize ball payout designation command indicating that 14 prize balls are paid out is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4324 whether or not it has received a large winning opening prize ball payout designation command, and if it determines that it has received a large winning opening prize ball payout designation command, in step S4325, A process of counting the total number of game balls (prize balls) put out based on the winning to the big winning hole 14 (big winning hole prize ball counting process) is performed (see FIG. 74). The effect control microcomputer 121 sets the counter value of the prize ball counter 133 to the number corresponding to the number of game balls (prize balls) paid out by one winning to the big winning hole 14 in the big winning hole prize ball counting process. , specifically, "14" is added. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 clears the counter value of the prize ball counter 133 when switching from the variable probability effect mode or the time saving effect mode to the normal effect mode in the effect mode setting process of step S4311. As a result, the counter value of the prize ball counter 133 indicates the total number of winning balls, so the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the counter value of the prize ball counter 133 and counts the total number of winning balls in the advantageous game state end effect. indicate.

As described above, the pachinko game machine PY7 can execute the set value effect by the first effect method and the set value effect by the second effect method. As the set value effect by the first effect method, the set value effect of the effect mode (first normal mode) suggesting that the set value is one of the set values ``1'' to ``3''; There is a setting value effect of the effect mode (second normal mode) that suggests that the currently set value is one of the set values "4" to "6". On the other hand, as the set value effect by the second effect method, there is a set value effect of effect modes (first specific mode to sixth specific mode) that suggest the set value itself. Here, the first normal mode comprehensively suggests that the set value is relatively low, and the second normal mode comprehensively suggests that the set value is relatively high. Also, the first to sixth specific modes directly suggest setting values in one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, as for the accuracy of the information on the set values, the second production method (first specific mode to sixth specific mode) is better than the first production mode (first normal mode to second normal mode). It is high, and it is easier for the player to understand the set value set in the second presentation method. Then, the set value production is executed in the advantageous game state end production, but from the high probability high base game state (probability variable production mode) or the low probability high base game state (time reduction production mode) to the low probability low base game state (normal production mode), the high probability high base game state (probability variable production mode), or the last special figure fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation production) related to the low probability high base game state (time saving production mode) In the advantageous game state end performance executed at the timing, the set value performance of the first performance method is executed and the set value performance of the second performance method in which the set values are easier to understand than the first performance method. is sometimes executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the set value performance, prevent the player from getting tired of the set value performance, and alleviate the deterioration of the performance effect of the set value performance.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY7, the transition from a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state relatively advantageous to the player to a low-probability low-base game state relatively disadvantageous to the player. , the set value rendering is executed. Therefore, if the player finds that a relatively high set value is set in the set value effect, even if the player enters a low-probability low-base game state (falls into a normal game state), the desire to play will not decrease. It can be relieved and the game can be continued. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY7, when the special figure fluctuation display is executed in the high probability high base game state or the low probability high base game state, the condition for executing the set value production by the second production method ( Suggestion effect suggesting the type of operation part 42k to be operated (upper operation part 42ku, lower operation part 42kd, left operation part 42kl, right operation part 42kr), timing of operation (at the time of execution of advantageous game state end effect)) can be performed. Therefore, even in a high-base game state in which the special figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal game state and the game is likely to proceed indifferently, it is possible to draw attention to the performance.

(Modified example of the seventh embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY7 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The specific effect contents related to the set value effect of the first effect method and the set value effect of the second effect method are not limited to the seventh embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, as the effect content related to the first effect method, whether the set value is relatively low or high is discriminated based on the patterns, colors, and colors of the background portion and character portion of the advantageous game state end effect image G62. It is good to be able to do so. Alternatively, by displaying an image (for example, a predetermined character) different from the advantageous game state end effect image G62, it is possible to distinguish whether the set value is relatively low or high. good. Further, as the effect content related to the second effect method, the set value itself may be identified by the pattern/color/color of the background portion and character portion of the advantageous game state end effect image G62. . Alternatively, by displaying an image (for example, a number) different from the character, it may be possible to distinguish whether the set value is relatively low or high.

Also, in the seventh embodiment, the set value effect is executed by the image displayed on the image display device 50, but the type of effect device that executes the set value effect is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the setting value effect may be executed by outputting sound from the speaker 52, emitting light from the frame lamp 53, or operating the moving board device 55, or the like. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the type of effect device is the same for the first effect method and the second effect method, but even if the type of effect device is different for the first effect method and the second effect method, good.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the set value effect is executed when the advantageous game state end effect is being executed, but the execution timing of the set value effect is not limited to the seventh embodiment and can be appropriately changed. . The set value effect may be executed at a predetermined timing in the jackpot game effect such as the opening effect, the round effect, or the ending effect. Alternatively, the set value production may be executed at a predetermined timing in the special figure fluctuation production, such as when the special figure fluctuation production starts, when the reach is established, when the SP reach develops, or when the win-lose branch occurs. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display other than the last in the high probability high base game state and the low probability high base game state (time reduction state) (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display and the special figure fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times in the middle), the setting Value production may be performed. Furthermore, the set value effect may be executed at a predetermined timing in the demonstration effect.

In addition, although the set value performance of the first performance method is executed so as to be incorporated into the advantageous game state end performance, the set value performance of the first performance method is executed in a form independent of the advantageous game state end performance. You can do it. In this case, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied by the predetermined timing, the set value effect of the first effect method is executed, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied by the predetermined timing, the set value effect of the second effect method is executed. is executed, the first effect method and the second effect method may be selectively executed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the jackpot game executed in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol in the special figure fluctuation display in the normal game state (it was determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination in the normal game state). At the start of the game, cross-button operation section determination for determining a predetermined condition related to the second effect method is executed. Also good. For example, the cross button operation unit determination may be executed immediately before executing the suggestive effect. Further, the cross button operation section determination may be executed at a specific timing other than the start of the jackpot game, such as when a specific round game is played in the jackpot game or when the ending ends. Note that this example of change is an example of changing the execution timing of cross-button operation section determination when the set value effect is executed in the advantageous game state end effect as in the seventh embodiment, so the timing of the set value effect is different. , the execution timing of cross-button operation section determination may be appropriately changed accordingly.

Furthermore, the specific effect content of the suggestive effect is not limited to the seventh embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in combination as one effect type of the foretelling effect, but it may be executed independently from the foretelling effect and the like. Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed by an image displayed on the image display device 50, but the type of effect device that executes the suggestive effect is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the suggestive effect may be executed by voice output by the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, operation by the board moving device 55, or the like. Also, the suggestive effect may be executed by a different type of effect device from the set value effect.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the condition for executing the set value effect by the second effect method is "when the advantageous game state end effect is being executed, the type of cross determined by the cross button operation unit determination is operating the operation part of the button 42k", but this condition is not limited to this and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the timing of operating the cross button 42k may be a predetermined period from after the cross button operation portion determination is executed to before the advantageous game state end effect is executed. Also, the selection target related to the condition may be the type of operation device (first effect button 40k, second effect button 41k, and cross button 42k) instead of the operation part of the cross button 42k. Alternatively, the selection target related to the condition is not the type of the operation portion of the cross button 42k (the upper operation portion 42ku, the lower operation portion 42kd, the left operation portion 42kl, the right operation portion 42kr), but the first effect button 40k, the second The type of operation method for any specific operation means among the effect button 41k and the cross button 42k (simple one-time pressing operation, repeated pressing operation, and continuous pressing operation for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press)). Furthermore, instead of determining one from a plurality of operation units, a plurality of operation devices, or a plurality of operation methods, one operation unit, operation device, or operation method is set as the condition from the beginning. You can let it be. In addition, the condition for executing the set value effect by the second effect method is not the operation content by the operation means such as the operation unit, the operation device, and the operation method, but for example, the game launched in the high probability high base game state etc. It may be set in association with other items such as the number of balls (the number of outs), the number of appearances of a specific effect such as reach, or a specific time.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, in the set value rendering of the first rendering method, the relative level of the set value is suggested, and in the set value rendering of the second rendering method, the set value itself is set. However, the information about the setting value that is the target of the setting value effect is easier to understand the setting value set in the second effect method than in the first effect method (information accuracy is high). It may be changed as appropriate within the range of the condition. For example, in the setting value rendering of the first rendering method, it suggests whether the set value is even or odd, and in the setting value rendering of the second rendering method, the set value is the lowest level (set value "1" or set value "2"), medium level (set value "3" or set value "4"), or highest level (set value "5" or set value "6") may be suggested.

7. OTHER MODIFIED EXAMPLES Further, other modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine PY7 according to the seventh embodiment will be described below. do. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine PY and the pachinko gaming machines PY1 to PY7 are referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY and the like".

The structures of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, instead of the set value cylinder 70, a two-contact type slide switch may be used as a machine that enables an operation to change the set value. In this case, when the knob is arranged at one position, an operation to change the set value may be performed. Furthermore, a rotary switch or a slide switch may be used instead of the set value switch 71 as a machine for setting the set value. In this case, the position of the knob may be directly associated with the set value. Also, the positions of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

Also, the configuration of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, other indicators such as a dot matrix LED indicator may be used as the indicator for displaying the set values. Furthermore, the position of the set value indicator 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the set value indicator 87 may be arranged at a location not on the game control board 100 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game RAM 104 is cleared by operating the set value cylinder 70 to change the set value. may be provided so that the game RAM 104 can be cleared without performing an operation for changing the set value.

Also, the setting value confirmation operation is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 can recognize a rotation operation to the handle 72k, and the set value may be determined when the rotation operation of the handle 72k is performed. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 can recognize the operation of the so-called "rental button" or "return button", and the set value is determined by the operation of these buttons. Also good.

Furthermore, as setting values, six setting values from setting value "1" to setting value "6" are provided, but the number of setting values is not limited to six and may be set as appropriate. Further, the identification information for the setting value is not limited to numbers such as "1" to "6", but may be letters or other symbols such as "A" to "F".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY, etc., the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big winning game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big winning game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14 .

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY, etc., when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always progresses in a high-probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions for the high-probability state may be changed. For example, in addition to the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which game balls can enter when opened is provided at a position where the game balls can reach in the game area 6, and a second big winning device is provided at a position where the game balls can reach. In a predetermined round game, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning device by opening the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state occurs with the end of the big winning game. may be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big winning device opens for an easy time (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second big winning device A non-specific jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. In addition, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game balls can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game balls to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Although the opening time of the second big prize device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second big prize device and the operation mode of the sorting device makes it easy to set the high probability state and the high probability state. It is also possible to provide a jackpot pattern that is difficult to set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY or the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). As shown by 120, the control of the game and the control of the presentation are performed by different substrates, but they may be configured to be performed by one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

Although effects related to set values according to the first to sixth embodiments can be executed in different scenes, in one pachinko game machine PY1 to PY6, the effects related to the first to sixth embodiments are possible. It may be possible to appropriately execute an effect related to the setting value.

Also, within a consistent range, the game machine of the present invention can be applied to other pinball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a mammoth ball game machine, and reel-type game machines (so-called "slot machines"). It is possible.

8. Other Inventions Disclosed in the Embodiments The following Inventions A to G are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]. In the description of inventions A to G, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiments of the invention described above and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A3, Invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B5, Invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C7, and Invention D is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C7. , Invention E is a generic term for inventions E1 to E5 below, Invention F is a generic term for inventions F1 to F6 below, and Invention G is a generic term for inventions G1 below. It is a general term for ~G3.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The game machine according to invention A1 is
Determination means (for game control that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (jackpot determination) microcomputer 101);
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting a setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6) for the determination means to make the determination,
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means,
The directing means includes one specific directing means,
The production control means is
As the effect by the specific effect means, when executing the first specific effect (non-loop second normal front stage BGM) of the first method (non-loop type), and when executing the second method (loop type) different from the first method ), there is a time to execute the second specific effect (loop second normal pre-stage BGM),
Based on the set value, when either one of the first specific effect and the second specific effect is being executed, it may be switched to the other.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to Invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A1,
further comprising a symbol display control means for notifying the determination result of the determination means by means of variable display of symbols (special symbols);
The first method is a method in which the effect is started each time the variable display of the symbols is started, and is completed in one variable display of the symbols,
The second method is characterized in that it is a method that can be executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays of the symbols.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A2,
The specific directing means is composed of a speaker,
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are composed of BGM.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The game machine according to invention B1 is
Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to set an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; ,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting a setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6) for the determination means to make the determination,
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means,
The effect means includes a vibrating vibrating body (first effect button 40k) and a speaker capable of outputting sound,
The effect control means may execute a specific effect (hybrid effect) for vibrating the vibrating body and outputting a vibrating sound corresponding to the vibration, based on the result of the determination and the set value. Characterized by

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The specific effect includes a first specific effect (pre-reading hybrid effect) in which the vibrating body vibrates for a first time (short vibration) and a first vibration sound (burtsu) corresponding to the vibration for the first time is output. , the vibrator vibrates for a second time longer than the first time (long vibration), and a second specific effect ( It is characterized by having the hybrid production).

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2,
Possibility of setting a set value relatively advantageous to the player is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to invention B4 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2 or invention B3,
It is characterized in that the possibility of the advantageous game state is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
After executing the specific effect a predetermined number of times (1 time to 5 times), a special effect (the hybrid effect of the second effect type) is executed in which only one of the vibration of the vibrating body and the output of the vibration sound is performed. It is characterized by the fact that

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to set an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; ,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting one of a plurality of types (set value 1 to set value 6) as a set value for the determination means to perform the determination and,
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means,
The production control means is capable of executing a predetermined alert (production to prevent forgetting to take prepaid cards),
A normal mode (a normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the setting value) that can be executed regardless of the type of the setting value, and a normal mode that does not suggest information about the setting value. and a special mode (a special mode suggesting information about set values) that can be executed only in a specific type.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The game machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The alert can be executed using an image display device capable of displaying an image and an audio output device capable of outputting audio,
The effect control means executes the normal aspect of the alerting and the special aspect of the alerting with the same effect content for either one of the image display device and the audio output device; The other of the image display device and the audio output device is characterized in that the alerting in the normal mode and the alerting in the special mode are performed with different effects.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The game machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The production means includes an image display device capable of displaying images and an audio output device capable of outputting audio,
The effect control means executes either one of the normal aspect of the alert and the special aspect of the alert using both the image display device and the audio output device, and the normal aspect of the alert. Either one of the alerting and the alerting of the special mode is performed using only one of the image display device and the audio output device.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The game machine according to invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C3,
Immediately before or immediately after the attention call, a specific effect (display of CI) indicating specific matters that are not directly related to the game content may be executed,
As an effect mode of the specific effect, there is a mode that can be executed regardless of the type of the set value, but there is no mode that can be executed only when the set value is a specific type. Characterized by

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C4,
The alert includes a first alert (result to prevent forgetting to take the prepaid card) that alerts the user to the first matter, and a second alert that alerts the user to a second item that differs from the first item (prevention of addiction). ) and there is
The first alert may be executed in the normal mode or the special mode, while the second alert may be performed in the normal mode. is not executed in the special mode.

8-3-6. Invention C6
The game machine according to invention C6 is
A gaming machine according to invention C5,
It further comprises operation means (return button 43k) operated when taking out a storage medium (prepaid card) storing predetermined information for executing a game,
In the first alerting, the alerting regarding forgetting to take out the storage medium is performed.

8-3-7. Invention C7
The gaming machine according to invention C7 is
A gaming machine according to Invention C5 or Invention C6,
The advantageous game state includes a jackpot game state and a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state) that can be after the jackpot game state,
The first alert and the second alert can be executed at the ending of the jackpot gaming state,
In the ending of the jackpot game state executed when it is determined to be in the advantageous game state in the determination in the normal game state, both the first alert and the second alert are executed, and the specific game In the ending of the jackpot game state executed when it is determined in the determination in the state that the advantageous game state is set, the second attention is executed, but the first attention is not executed. .

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to set an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; ,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting a setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6) for the determination means to make the determination,
Symbol display control means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1502, S1503, and S1504) for executing symbol display (special symbol variable display) for notifying the result of the determination when the determination is made;
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means,
When the number of times the symbol display is executed after a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of times of addiction) is the number of times associated with the set value set at that time, the effect control means It is characterized by executing a set value suggesting effect (set value suggesting effect) that suggests.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
The setting values that can be set by the setting means include a first setting value (setting value 5) and a second setting value (setting value 6) different from the first setting value,
The number of times (such as 555 times) associated with the first setting value and the number of times (such as 666 times) associated with the second setting value are different,
effect content of the set value suggesting effect executed when the first set value is set; and effect content of the set value suggesting effect executed when the second set value is set; are identical.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
The setting values include a first setting value (setting value 5) and a second setting value (setting value 6) different from the first setting value,
the number of times associated with the first set value (456 times) is the same as the number of times associated with the second set value (456 times);
effect content of the set value suggesting effect executed when the first set value is set; and effect content of the set value suggesting effect executed when the second set value is set; are identical.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D3,
The advantageous gaming state includes a jackpot gaming state,
The number of times the symbol display is performed after the predetermined condition is established is the number of times the symbol display is performed without entering the big win game state next after the big win game state is performed. and

8-4-5. Invention D5
The gaming machine according to invention D5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D4,
The symbol display control means, in the symbol display, variably displays the symbols and then stops and displays them in a manner suggesting the result of the determination;
The effect control means is characterized by executing the set value suggesting effect when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to set an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; ,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting one of a plurality of types (set value 1 to set value 6) as a set value for the determination means to perform the determination and,
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means,
In a game machine where the game method is switched (right-handed → left-handed),
The effect control means can execute a specific effect (left-handed effect) that allows the player to recognize the switching of the game method,
The effect mode of the specific effect includes a normal mode (a normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value) that can be executed regardless of the type of the set value, and a normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value. and a special mode (a special mode suggesting information about set values) that can be executed only in a specific type.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The game machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
The specific effect can be executed using an image display device capable of displaying images and an audio output device capable of outputting audio,
The effect control means executes the specific effect of the normal mode and the specific effect of the special mode with the same effect content for either one of the image display device and the audio output device, The other of the image display device and the audio output device is characterized in that the specific effect of the normal mode and the specific effect of the special mode are executed with different effect contents.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
The production means includes an image display device capable of displaying images and an audio output device capable of outputting audio,
The effect control means executes either one of the specific effect of the normal mode and the specific effect of the special mode using both the image display device and the audio output device, and the normal mode. and the other of the specific effect of the special mode is executed using only one of the image display device and the audio output device.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The game machine according to invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions E1 to E3,
The game method includes a first game method (left-handed) and a second game method (right-handed) different from the first game method,
The specific effects include a first specific effect (right-handed effect) capable of making the player recognize switching from the first game method to the second game method, and There is a second specific effect (left-handed effect) that allows the player to recognize the switching to the game method,
The second specific effect may be executed in the normal mode or in the special mode, while the first specific effect may be executed in the normal mode. It is characterized by not being carried out in a special manner.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to invention E4,
A shooting operation means (handle 72k) that can be operated to shoot the game ball toward the game area where the game ball can flow down is further provided,
The game area includes a first specific game area (left game area 6A) and a second specific game area (right game area 6B) that differ in operation mode for causing the game ball to flow down,
While it is appropriate to let the game ball flow down to the first specific game area in the normal game state, it is appropriate to let the game ball flow down to the second specific game area in the advantageous game state,
The first game method is to operate the shooting operation means so as to cause the game ball to flow down to the first specific game area (left hitting), and the second game method is to move the game ball to the second specific game area. It is characterized by operating the shooting operation means so as to flow down to the game area (right hitting).

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is
A launching means (shooting device 72) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball can flow down;
Judgment means (S1602, S1609) for judging whether or not to execute a jackpot game by passing the game ball through the start area (first start opening 11, second start opening 12) provided in the game area game control microcomputer 101),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting one of a plurality of types (set value 1 to set value 6) as a set value for the determination means to perform the determination and,
Production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production in the production means,
A game machine comprising a prize ball payout means (payout control board 170) capable of paying out game balls as prize balls when a predetermined condition is established (wins a prize in a big prize opening 14) at least in the jackpot game. There is
The production control means is
It is possible to calculate a predetermined calculated value (measured value) based on the number of game balls shot into the game area and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls,
When the calculated value is higher than the judgment value (V1 to V6) set according to the set value, it is possible to execute a set value effect (confirmation effect) suggesting the set set value. and
It is characterized in that the higher the set value is, the higher the judgment value is.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The game machine according to invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
Further comprising timer means (RTC 131) capable of measuring the time elapsed since the gaming machine was turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing the set value effect on condition that the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
Further comprising a clock means (RTC 131) capable of measuring time,
The effect control means is capable of executing the set value effect on condition that the time measured by the clock means reaches a predetermined time.

8-6-4. Invention F4
The gaming machine according to invention F4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions F1 to F3,
The production control means is
When a specific set value is set as the set value, it is possible to execute, as the set value rendition, a specific set value rendition suggesting that the specific set value is set,
When the specific setting value and a predetermined setting value different from the specific setting value are set, the effect control means sets the specific setting value or the predetermined setting value. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a semi-set value effect (semi-confirmation effect) that suggests that.

8-6-5. Invention F5
The gaming machine according to invention F5 is
A gaming machine according to invention F4 including invention F2,
It is possible to execute the semi-set value effect on the condition that the elapsed time has reached the first time,
The set value effect can be executed on condition that the elapsed time has reached a second time longer than the first time.

8-6-6. Invention F6
The gaming machine according to invention F6 is
A gaming machine according to invention F4 including invention F3,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute the semi-set value effect on the condition that the time measured by the time measuring means has reached a first time,
The set value effect can be executed on condition that the time measured by the clock means has reached a second time later than the first time.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The game machine according to invention G1 is
Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting a setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6) for the determination means to make the determination,
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means,
As an effect that can be executed by the effect control means, there is a specific effect (set value effect) that suggests predetermined information about the set value,
The production mode of the specific production includes a first production mode (first normal mode to second normal mode) and a second production mode (first specific mode), which is easier to understand than the first production mode. Aspect to sixth specific aspect),
The production control means is
When executing the specific effect at a predetermined timing (when the advantageous game state end effect is being executed), the type determined by the cross button operation unit determination under a predetermined condition (when the advantageous game state end effect is being executed) operating the operating portion of the cross button 42k) is established, the specific production of the second production mode is executed, and if the predetermined condition is not established, the specific production of the first production mode is executed. A game machine characterized by

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1,
As game states in which the determination can be executed, there are a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high-probability high-base game state, low-probability high-base game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
A game state control means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1504) for switching from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is further provided,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means may execute the specific effect in response to switching from the advantageous game state to the normal game state.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The game machine according to invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to invention G2,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means may execute a suggestive effect (suggestive effect) suggesting the content of the predetermined condition in the advantageous game state.

PY, PY1 to PY7... Pachinko machine 1... Game board 11... First starting hole 11a... First starting hole sensor 12... Second starting hole 12a... Second starting hole sensor 14... Big winning hole 14a... Big winning hole sensor 40 First effect button device 40k First effect button 40a First effect button sensor 41 Second effect button device 41k Second effect button 41a Second effect Button sensor 42 Cross button device 42k Cross button 42ku Upper operation unit 42kd Lower operation unit 42kl Left operation unit 42kr Right operation unit 42a Cross button sensor 42au Upper operating section sensor 42ad Lower operating section sensor 42al Left operating section sensor 42ar Right operating section sensor 50 Image display device 50a Display section 52 Speaker 53 Frame lamp 55 Board movable device 55k... Board movable body 70... Set value cylinder 70a... Set value cylinder sensor 71... Set value switch 71a... Set value switch sensor 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 140 for image control board

Claims (1)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game;
setting means capable of setting a set value for the determination means to make the determination;
A production control means capable of executing a predetermined production by the production means;
and an operation means operable by the player,
As an effect that can be executed by the effect control means, there is a specific effect that suggests predetermined information regarding the set value,
There are a plurality of types of setting values,
The effect mode of the specific effect includes a first effect mode associated with a group including at least two types, each of which is divided based on a predetermined standard from a plurality of types related to the set value, and various types of settings . There is a second rendering mode that is associated one-to-one with the value ,
There are a plurality of types of operation modes of the operation means,
The production control means is
At a first timing, any one of a plurality of types of operation mode of the operation means can be determined,
At a second timing after the first timing , the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode associated with the set value, and the specific effect in the first effect mode is executed. When an operation is performed in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means determined at the first timing when the display is on, the effect mode of the specific effect is associated with the set value set from the first effect mode. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the second presentation mode .

Images